Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 578

Patran 2010

Interface To MSC Nastran

Preference Guide
Volume 1: Structural Analysis
Corporate Europe Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Corporation MSC.Software GmbH MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
2 MacArthur Place Am Moosfeld 13 Shinjuku First West 8F
Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA 81829 Munich, Germany 23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
Telephone: (800) 345-2078 Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0 1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Fax: (714) 784-4056 Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6 Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com

Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with
the terms of such license.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not
intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no
liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information
contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright 2010 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited.
The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from
MSC.Software suppliers. Contains IBM XL Fortran for AIX V8.1, Runtime Modules, (c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1990-2002,
All Rights Reserved.
MSC, MSC/, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Fatigue, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Laminate Modeler are trademarks or registered
trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is
a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software
Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a
registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA.
EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Macrovision
Corporation. HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS
and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of UGS Corp. a Siemens
Group Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners.

P3:V2010:Z:INT-NA:Z: DC-USR-PDF
Contents
Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Patran Interface
MD Nastran Pre
ence Guide,

1 Overview
Purpose 2
Using Patran with SOL 700 2

MD Nastran Product Information 3

2 Building A Model
Introduction to Building a Model 6

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 8


MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 14
MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) 15
Materials 15
Loads and Boundary Conditions 17
Elements and Properties 17
Solution Controls 17

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference


18
Element Creation 18
Element and p-Formulation Properties 19
Loads and Boundary Conditions 19
Analysis Definition 20
Results Import and Postprocessing 20
Potential Pitfalls 21
Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models 21

Coordinate Frames 22

Finite Elements 23
Nodes 23
Elements 24
Multi-point Constraints 27
MPC Types 28
Degrees of Freedom 31
Superelements 48
ii Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Select Boundary Nodes 49

Material Library 50
Materials Application Form 50
Material Input Properties Form 52
Material Constitutive Models 53
Linear Elastic 64
Nonlinear Elastic 65
Hyperelastic 66
Elastoplastic 69
Failure 72
Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3 73
Creep 75
Viscoelastic 76
Composite 76

Element Properties 78
Element Properties Form 78
Coupled Point Mass (CONM1) 82
Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 84
Lumped Point Mass (CONM2) 85
Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 87
Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 89
Bush 90
General Section Beam (CBAR) 93
P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM) 98
Curved General Section Beam (CBEND) 101
Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND) 104
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP) 106
Tapered Beam (CBEAM) 110
General Section Beam (CBEAM) 115
General Section Rod (CROD) 122
General Section Rod (CONROD) 125
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE) 127
Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 128
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 130
Viscous Damper (CVISC) 132
Gap (CGAP) 133
Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 135
PLOTEL 137
(Scalar) Bush 137
Spot Weld Connector (CWELD) 141
Fastener Connector (CFAST) 143
Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) 146
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR) 149
CONTENTS iii

P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) 152


Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP) 154
Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP) 157
Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 159
Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR) 162
P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 165
Field Point Mesh (CQUAD4/TRIA3)(Exterior Acoustics) 168
Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 170
Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR) 172
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 174
Standard Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6) 177
PLPLANE Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX, CQUADX) 178
2D Axi-Symmetric Laminated Solid Composite 179
Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 181
Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR) 182
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 184
Infinite (Exterior Acoustic Element)(CACINF3/CACINF4) 186
2D Plane Strain Laminated Solid Composite 187
Standard Membrane (CQUAD4) 188
Revised Membrane (CQUADR) 190
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4) 192
Shear Panel (CSHEAR) 195
Solid (CHEXA) 197
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA) 199
Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 201
Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) 202
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA) 204
3D Laminate Solid (CHEXA) 205

Beam Modeling 207


Cross Section Definition 207
Create Action 207
Supplied Functions 209
Cross Section Orientation 210
Cross Section End Offsets 212
Stiffened Cylinder Example 212

Loads and Boundary Conditions 214


Loads & Boundary Conditions Form 214
Object Tables 221
Preview Rigid Body Motion 230
Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600) 230
Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 ) 231
Select Discontinuities Subform 231
iv Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Edge Contact Subform 232


Select Contact Area 232
Select Exclusion Region 232
Select Deactivation Region 232
Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only) 233

Load Cases 236

Defining Contact Regions 237


Contact 239

Rotor Dynamics 240


Rotor Dynamics Form 241
Spin Profile Form 242
Spin History Form 242
Unbalance Form 243
Unbalance Properties Form 245

3 Running an Analysis
Review of the Analysis Form 250
Analysis Form 251
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal 253

Translation Parameters 255


External Superelement Specifications 258
Numbering Options 258
Select File 260

Solution Types 261

Direct Text Input 266

Solution Parameters 267


Linear Static 267
Nonlinear Static 269
Normal Modes 272
Buckling 277
Complex Eigenvalue 281
Frequency Response 286
Transient Response 289
Nonlinear Transient 292
Implicit Nonlinear 294
Solver Options Subform (SOL 600) 296
Contact Parameters Subform 297
CONTENTS v

Restart Parameters Subform 305


Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600) 307
Domain Decomposition 308
DDAM 311
DDAM in Patran 312
Explicit Nonlinear 316
Sol700 Parameters Subform 317
Hourglass Setting Subform 319
Merge Rigid Material Subform 321
Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform 323
Damping Per Property Subform 325
Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform 327
Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform 330
Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform 332
Eulerian Parameters Subform 333
SPH Control Parameters Subform 336
Results Output Format 338
ADAMS Preparation 340

Select Superelements 342

Subcases 344
Deleting Subcases 345
Editing Subcases 346

Subcase Parameters 347


Linear Static Subcase Parameters 348
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters 349
Arc-Length Method Parameters 351
Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters 352
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 354
Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 356
Transient Response Subcase Parameters 357
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters 360
Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 365
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type 366
Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 367
Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters 367
Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters 368
Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters 370
Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters 371
Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 372
Load Increment Parameters 373
Iteration Parameters 381
Contact Table 386
vi Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Breaking Glue Parameters Subform 390


Edge Contact Subform 391
392
Active/Deactive Elements 392
Break Squeal Parameters 393
Solvers/Options 394
DDAM Subcase Parameters 397
Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 399
Contact Table 401
Additional Contact Data 402
Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing 403
Additional Information 403

Output Requests 405


Basic Output Requests 406
Advanced Output Requests 407
Edit Output Requests Form 416
Default Output Request Information 418
Subcases Direct Text Input 421
SOL 600 Output Requests 422
DDAM Output Requests 428
Mode by Mode Output 429

Select Explicit MPCs... 433

Non-Structural Mass Properties 434

Select NSM Properties... 439

Subcase Select 441

Restart Parameters 444

Optimize 450

Toptomize 452
Objectives & Constraints 453
Optimization Control 454
Design Domain 456
Postprocessing 459

Interactive Analysis 460


Assumptions 460
Scenario 1 460
Scenario 2 460
The Process 461
Miscellaneous 461
CONTENTS vii

Analysis Form 462


Select Modal Results .DBALL 463
Loading Form 464
Create a Field Form 466
Output Selection Form 467
Define Frequencies Form 467

4 Read Results
Accessing Results 470
Results File Formats 471
Output2 Formats 471
XDB Formats 471
MASTER Formats 472
T16/T19 Formats 473
3dplot Formats 473
Translation Parameters 474
OUTPUT2 474
Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) 475
XDB 476
MASTER 477
T16/T19 479

Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities 480


Results 480
Global Variables 486
Coordinate Systems 487
Projected Global System 487
XY Plots 487
Model Data 488

Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities 489

Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities 494


Nodal Results 494
Elemental Results 501

Supported 3dplot Results Quantities 521

5 Read Input File


Review of Read Input File Form 524
Read Input File Form 525
Entity Selection Form 526
viii Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Define Offsets Form 528


Selection of Input File 529
Summary Data Form 529
Reject Card Form 531

Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File 532


Partial Decks 532
Coordinate Systems 532
Referential Integrity 532
Chaining 533
Grids and SPOINTs 533
SPOINTs 533
Referential Integrity 533
Elements and Element Properties 533
PSHELL Properties 537
BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions 537
Fields 537
Referential Integrity 537
Set Name Extensions 537
Materials 538
MPCs 539
Load Sets 540
Fields 541
TABLES 542

Conflict Resolution 543


Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs 543
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names 543

6 Delete
Review of Delete Form 546

Deleting an MD Nastran Job 547

7 Files
Files 550

8 Errors/Warnings
Errors/Warnings 554
CONTENTS ix

A Preference Configuration and Implementation


Software Components in Patran MD Nastran 556

Patran MD Nastran Preference Components 557

Configuring the Patran MD Nastran Execute File 560

Index 561
x Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Chapter 1: Overview
Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Overview
1

Purpose 2

MD Nastran Product Information 3
2 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Purpose

1.1 Purpose
Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation. The core
of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several optional products are available
including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interfaces to third party
solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces.
The Patran MD Nastran interface provides a communication link between Patran and MD Nastran. It also
provides for the customization of certain features in Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the
Patran system.
Selecting MD Nastran as the analysis code preference in Patran, activates the customization process.
These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the Patran MD Nastran
interface. Specifically, the Patran forms in these main areas are modified:
• Materials
• Element Properties
• Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing
• Loads and Boundary Conditions
• Analysis Forms

More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Implementation (App. A).

Using Patran with SOL 700


The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MD Nastran Input file for a SOL 700 analysis
is extensive for even a modest size model. The amount of information and the complexity of most models
makes it virtually impossible to generate the MD Nastran Input file with a text editor alone. Patran
provides a graphical user interface, an extensive line of model building tools that you can use to construct
and view your SOL 700 model, and generate a MD Nastran Input file for SOL 700.
When using Patran as a preprocessor for SOL 700, you are required to specify an analysis code. Selecting
MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) as the analysis code under the Analysis Preference menu,
customizes Patran in five main areas:
• Material Library
• Element Library
• Loads and Boundary Conditions
• MPCs
• Analysis forms

The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the MD Nastran Input
File format.
Chapter 1: Overview 3
MD Nastran Product Information

1.2 MD Nastran Product Information


MD Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is
developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 2 MacArthur Place, Santa Ana,
California 92707, (714) 540-8900. See the MD Nastran Reference Manual, Volume 1, for a general
description of MD Nastran’s capabilities.
4 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
MD Nastran Product Information
Chapter 2: Building A Model
Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Building A Model
2
 Introduction to Building a Model 6
 Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 8

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference 18
 Coordinate Frames 22
 Finite Elements 23
 Material Library 50
 Element Properties 78

Beam Modeling 207
 Loads and Boundary Conditions 214
 Load Cases 236

Defining Contact Regions 237

Rotor Dynamics 240
6 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Introduction to Building a Model

2.1 Introduction to Building a Model


There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms used to
create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis type. Other parts
of the model are created using standard forms.
The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code
(e.g., MD Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).

The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if the
model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be
converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option
defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the subsequent modeling steps.
These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the applicable
loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type may also affect the
Chapter 2: Building A Model 7
Introduction to Building a Model

allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis Form (Ch. 2) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

To use the Patran MD Nastran Application


should be set to MD Nastran.

The currently supported Analysis Type fo


Nastran are Structural, Thermal and Expl

Indicates the file suffixes used in creating


MD Nastran input and output files.
8 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

2.2 Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options


The following tables summarize all the various MD Nastran commands supported by the Patran MD
Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more information in this manual on
how the commands are supported.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 9
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Supported MD Nastran File Management Commands


Table2-1. Description
ASSIGN An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user specified MD
Nastran results suffix) to the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be created during the analysis.

Supported MD Nastran Executive Control Commands


Table 2-2. Pages
ECHO 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256
SOL 225
TIME 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256

Supported MD Nastran Case Control Commands

Table 2-3. Pages


ACCELERATION 250, 253
ACFPMRESULTS 369
ACPOWER 369
ADACT 17, 314
ADAPT 16, 170
DATAREC 17
DISPLACEMENT 230, 241, 250, 253
ELSDCON 230
ESE 230
FORCE 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253
FREQUENCY 250
GPSTRESS 369
INTENSITY 369
MAXLINES 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256
MPCFORCES 369
OLOAD 230, 241, 250, 253
SPCFORCES 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253
STRAIN 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253

Supported MD Nastran Bulk Data Entries


10 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Command Pages
ADAPT 16, 170, 225, 233
BEGIN AFPM 147
BEGIN SUPER 219
BCONP 212
BFRIC 212
BFRIC 212
CACINF3 160
CACINF4 160
CBARAO 86
CBAR 86
CBEAM 97, 100
CBEND 93, 95
CDAMP1 82
CDAMP2 219, 438
CELAS1 81
CELAS2 219, 438
CGAP 116
CHEXA 168
CMASS1 119
CMASS2 219, 438
CONM1 76
CONM2 79
CONROD 111
CPENTA 168
CQUAD4 124, 140, 148, 156, 162
CQUAD8 124, 140, 148, 156, 162
CQUADR 131, 142, 150, 157, 163
Command Pages
CROD 110
CSHEAR 166
CTETRA 168
CTRIAX6 153
Chapter 2: Building A Model 11
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

CTUBE 112
CVISC 115
DCONST 416
DOPTPRM 411, 416
DPHASE 188, 190
DRESP1/2 416
DTI, SETREE 309
DYNRED 240
EIGB 243, 238
EIGC 248
EIGR 238
EIGRL 238
EXTSEOUT 222
FEFACE 15
FEEDGE 15
FORCE 190
FREQ1 250
GMBC 188
GRAV 196
MOMENT 190
MAT1 424
MAT2 424
MAT3 424
MAT8 424
MAT9 424
MPC 28
NLPARM 315
OUTPUT 17, 369
PACINF 160
PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,
AUTOSPC 253, 256
PARAM, 230
INREL
PARAM, 230
ALTRED
12 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,


COUPMASS 253, 256
PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,
K6ROT 253, 256
PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,
WTMASS 253, 256
PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,
GRDPNT 253, 256
PARAM, 233, 256
LGDISP
PARAM,G 245, 250, 253, 256
PARAM,W3 253, 256
PARAM,W4 253, 256
PARAM, POST 219
PBAR 86
PBCOMP 97
PBEAM 100
PBEAM71
PBEAMD
PBELTD
PBEND 93, 95
PCOMP 136, 139
PDAMP 82
PELAS 81
PELAS1
PGAP 116
PLOAD1 199
PLOAD2 191
PLOAD4 191
PLOADX1 191, 149
PLOTEL 120
PLPLANE
PLSOLID
PMASS 119
POINT 15, 170
Chapter 2: Building A Model 13
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Pages
PROD 110
PSHEAR 166
PSHELL 124, 131, 140, 142, 148, 150,
156, 157, 162, 163
PSHELL1
PSHELLD
PSOLID 168
PSPRMA
PTUBE 112
PBEAM 100
PVAL 15, 170
PVISC 115
RBAR 29
RBE1 31
RBE2 32
RBE3 33
RFORCE 196
RROD 34
RSPLINE 35
RTRPLT 36
SESET 42, 219
SETREE 309
SPC1 188
SPCD 188
TEMP 193
TEMPF 146
TEMPRB 193
TEMPP1 193
TIC 197, 198
TSTEP 253
TSTEPNL 256, 318
14 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)


The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 600 analyses.
3D Contact Region

BCBODY Defines a flexible rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.


BCBOX* Defines a 3D contact region.
BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies.
BCMATL* Defines a 3D contact region by element material.
BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact.
BCPARA Defines contact parameters.
BCPROP* Defines a 3d contact region by element properties.
BCTABLE Defines a contact table.
BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by element IDs.
GMNURB 3D contact region made up of NURBS.

Initial Conditions

IPSTRAIN* Defines initial plastic strain values.


ISTRESS* Defines initial stress values.
MARCIN Insert a text string in MSC.Marc.
MARCOUT Selects data recovery output.

Materials

MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties.


MATF Specifies material failure model.
MATG* Gasket material properties.
MATHE Hyperelastic material properties.
MATHP Hyperelastic material properties.
MATHED Damage model properties for hyperelastic materials.
MATORT Elastic 3D orthotropic material properties.
MATTEP Thermoelastic-Plastic material properties.
MATTG* Temperature variation of interlaminar materials.
MATTHE Thermo hyperelastic material.
MATTORT* Thermoelastic orthotropic material
MATTVE* Thermo-visco-elastic material properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 15
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATVE* Viscoelastic material properties


MATVP Viscoplastic or creep material properties

Note: * Not supported in initial release of Patran (2004).


Note: Solution Control

NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.


NLDAMP Defines damping constants.
NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
PARAMARC Parallel domain decomposition.
RESTART Restart data.

Note:
Note: Element Properties

NTHICK Defines nodal thickness values for beams, plates, and/or shells.

MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)


The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 700 analyses.

Materials
MATD001 Isotropic Elastic material for beam, shell and solid.
MATD003 Isotropic and kinematic hardening plasticity.
MATD005 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam.
MATD006 Isotropic viscoelastic material.
MATD007 Isotropic material to model nearly incompressible continuum rubber.
MATD012 Isotropic plasticity for 3D solids.
MATD014 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam with failure.
MATD015 Isotropic Johnson/Cook strain and temperature sensitive plasticity.
MATD019 Isotropic strain rate dependent material.
MATD020 Isotropic rigid material.
MATD022 Orthotropic material with optional brittle failure for composites.
MATD024 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with stress x strain curve and strain rate
dependency.
MATD026 Anisotropic honeycomb and foam material.
MATD027 Isotropic material to model rubber using two variables.
MATD028 Isotropic elasto-plastic material for beam and shell.
16 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATD030 Isotropic superelastic material.


MATD031 Isotropic material to model rubber using the Frazer-Nash formulation.
MATD032 Orthotropic laminated glass material.
MATD057 Isotropic material to model highly compressible low density foams.
MATD058 *MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC
MATD062 Isotropic material to model viscous foams.
MATD063 Isotropic material to model crushable foams.
MATD064 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with a power law hardening.
MATD067 *MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD068 *MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD069 *MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD070 *MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD071 *MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD073 *MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM
MATD074 *MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD076 *MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC
MATD083 *MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM
MATD087 *MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER
MATD093 *MAT_ELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD094 *MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD095 *MAT_INELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD097 *MAT_GENERAL_JOINT_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD100 Isotropic spotweld material.
MATD103 Anisotropic viscoplastic material.
MATD119 *MAT_GENERAL_NONLINEAR_6DOF_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD121 *MAT_GURSON_RCDC
MATD126 *MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB
MATD20M *MAT_RIGID
MATDB01 *MAT_SEATBELT
MATDS01 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTIC
MATDS02 *MAT_DAMPER_VISCOUS
MATDS03 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTOPLASTIC
MATDS04 *MAT_SPRING_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC
MATDS05 *MAT_DAMPER_NONLINEAR_VISCOUS
Chapter 2: Building A Model 17
Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATDS06 *MAT_SPRING_GENERAL_NONLINEAR
MATDS07 *MAT_SPRING_MAXWELL
MATDS08 *MAT_SPRING_INELASTIC
MATDS13 *MAT_SPRING_TRILINEAR_DEGRADING
MATDS14 *MAT_SPRING_SQUAT_SHEARWALL
MATDS15 *MAT_SPRING_MUSCLE

Loads and Boundary Conditions


TIC3 Defines initial rotational field.
WALL Defines planar rigid wall.

Elements and Properties


CDAMP1D Scalar damper connection for SOL 700
CELAS1D Scalar spring connection for SOL 700.

Solution Controls
Form Parameters
Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE,
Parameters DYMINSTEP, DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS,
DYTSTEPDT2MS
General Parameters DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,
DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,
DYSHNIP
Contact Parameters DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,
DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE,
DYCONSKIPTWG
Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH,
Database File DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG,
Parameters DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ,
DYN3THDT

DAMPGBL Dynamic relaxation control.


18 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

2.3 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD


Nastran Preference
In Version 68 of MSC. Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The Patran
MD Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some fundamental differences
in approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this section will serve as a guide
to these.
MSC .Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two areas. Shell
and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear dynamic solution
sequences. Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities.

Element Creation
MD Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA
elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beams BAR
elements. Patran and MD Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15,
WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7,
TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-
solids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9,
QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive
analysis for beams. The preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order
elements--HEX64, WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support
for lower-order elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic
elements allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results
from the MD Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MD Nastran FEEDGE and
POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and WEDGE52 elements
are easily created with the Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet
Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver.
For p-elements, Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of
two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not necessarily C1
continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce kinks which cause false
stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especially for thin curved shells.
In Version 7 of Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted so that the
edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas translator. After
the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the Patran database has
changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adjustment of midside
nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are
adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a
cubic edge are not adjusted.
Patran generates the input for MD Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE Bulk Data entries with POINTs
are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge in MD
Nastran. The points generated by Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a parameter entry PARAM,
PEDGEP, 1 is written by Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs are not moved in MD
Chapter 2: Building A Model 19
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MD Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge.
The C1 continuous cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results.
In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the quality
of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when exact geometry
was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision
accuracy.

Element and p-Formulation Properties


Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properties application by
choosing Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D
Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and p-Formulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this
case are described on (p. 199). Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the material property
name is required.
Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These
properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial
directions. Although these are integer values, in Patran, each property is defined using the Patran vector
definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to many useful tools in the Patran
system for defining and manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would define these properties
with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
Patran will convert these values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the Patran MD Nastran Preference will
interpret them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined
using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are constant over the model, but it is
desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single
property definition. The Patran MD Nastran Preference will provide additional help for this modeling
function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are imported, vector, spatial fields will
optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a
single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element properties by selecting the appropriate
field.
A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of stress
singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners),
boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point forces). Sometimes it is easier
to tell the adaptive analysis to “ignore” these singular regions than it is to change the model. This can be
done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1>
or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes called “sacrificial” elements.

Loads and Boundary Conditions


It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to
become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element creation and loads
application to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions don’t dominate the analysis.
Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed displacements.
There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. The Element Uniform
and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the
20 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are
produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced.
Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements. Distributed loads
can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the
faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements.

Analysis Definition
Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC .Nastran; both
solution types are supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference. Only a few parameters on the
Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a version of MSC . Nastran
prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation
Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order to process the results in Patran. The Solution
Parameters forms for the linear static and normal modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles
option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Create has options to limit
the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the Advanced Output Requests
form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be produced for all adaptive
cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle.

Results Import and Postprocessing


Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MD Nastran p-element analyses.
Both approaches rely on MD Nastran creating results for a “VU mesh” where each p-element is
automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default
MD Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for
beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the Patran nodes and elements during import. This
mapping will occur for all 10, Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate
mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-order Patran elements.
When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x
3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The Patran MD Nastran
Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higher-
order VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MD Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and
results entities into a new, empty Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported
directly, rather than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is
currently supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form.
It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots) may be
discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids generated by MD
Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coincident nodes and a result
associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence operation to remove these
coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect.
For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis. The result
types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default,
the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that output quantities specific to
Chapter 2: Building A Model 21
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is
desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one.
One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of
selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the Results
application.

Potential Pitfalls
There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct p-element models for MD
Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the Patran higher order-elements. These nodes
are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are
not associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign
loads or boundary conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is
applied to the face of a Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including the
midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should
instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure.

Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models


Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, p-element analysis is relatively straightforward. The first
step is to read the NASTRAN input file into Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model
may contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to
use the Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard
Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many options
specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property modification step is
the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis.
Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls, 21, it is appropriate to modify the types of loads and
boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement
constraints are applied using MD Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In p-element analyses, element-
oriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified
using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC
type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints
are more appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of
element faces. As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible,
it is beneficial to redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an
alternative is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be
done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maximum P-orders vector
appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model
need not be changed for the p-element analysis.
22 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Coordinate Frames

2.4 Coordinate Frames


Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry, depending
on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in Patran. The
RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construction method used in
Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the coordinate frame
definition in Patran.

Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and boundary
conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating
Coordinate Frames (p. 393) in the Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2.

To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the environment
variable “WRITE_ALL_COORDS” to ON.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 23
Finite Elements

2.5 Finite Elements


The Finite Elements Application in Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction.
Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point constraints, and
Superelement.

For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms (p. 25)
in the Reference Manual - Part III.

Nodes
Nodes in Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MD Nastran. Nodes can be created
either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated
Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly from the assigned node
24 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is
assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry are left blank.

The analysis frame (CD of


the GRID) is the
coordinate system in which
the displacements,
degrees of freedom,
constraints, and solution
vector are defined.
The coordinate system in
which the node location is
defined (CP of the GRID)
can be either the reference
coordinate frame, the
analysis coordinate frame,
or a global reference
(blank), depending on the
value of the forward
translation parameter
“Node Coordinates.”

Elements
The Finite Elements Application in Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard
finite elements. The type of MD Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element
properties are assigned (for example, shell or 2D solid). See the Element Properties Form, 78 for details
concerning the MD Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element
object, or indirectly using the Mesh object
Chapter 2: Building A Model 25
Finite Elements

.
26 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

This type of form is used to create a 1D,


2D, or 3D element mesh.

Beginning IDs for nodes and elements to


be created.

Elem Shape is used to specify the shape of


the elements created by meshing. For
example, the shape for a 2D element can
be either triangular or quadralateral.

Mesher is used to specify how the element


mesh is to be created; for example,
IsoMesh, Paver. The type of geometry (for
example, simple (green) or complex
(magenta) surface) may determine the
choice of the mesher.

List of surface IDs of surfaces to be


meshed. For example Surface 1, 2, 3, or
Surface 1:3.
The value of Global Edge Length specifies
the approximate size of the elements
created when meshing.

The button Select Existing Prop... is used


to select an existing element property (for
example, 2D Shell) that will be assigned to
the elements created by meshing.
The button Create New Property is used to
create an element property that will be
assigned to the elements that will be
created by meshing. During creating the
element property no application region can
be specified; it is specified automatically
using all the elements created by meshing.

This “ghosted” area will become dark when an element property is selected.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 27
Finite Elements

Multi-point Constraints
Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These are
special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for
creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form. The full
functionality of the MPC forms are defined in Create Action (FEM Entities).

Used to specify the ID to associate to


the MPC when it is created.
28 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

MPC Types
To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu. The MPC types that
appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type
preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MD Nastran.

MPC Type Analysis Type Description


Explicit Structural Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedom
and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent
term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an
independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree
of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be
specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The
constant term is not allowed in MD Nastran.
RSSCON Structural Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a
Surf-Vol linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D
solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One
dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term
consists of a single node.
Rigid (Fixed) Structural and Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or
Explicit more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of
Nonlinear freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of
dependent terms can be specified, while only one independent term
can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no
constant term for this MPC type.
RBAR Structural and Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two
Explicit nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be
Nonlinear specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of
freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be
the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any
combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be
specified as independent as long as the total number of independent
degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this
MPC type.
RBE1 Structural Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to
an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent
terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of
degrees of freedom. Any number of independent terms can be
specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom
specified in all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at
least one degree of freedom must be specified for each term there
is no way the user can create more that six independent terms.
There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 29
Finite Elements

MPC Type Analysis Type Description


RBE2 Structuraland Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an
Explicit arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one
Nonlinear dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to
this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of
freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified,
which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this
MPC type.
RBE3 Structuraland Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference
Explicit node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An
Nonlinear arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term
consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first
dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other
dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which
are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms
can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant
coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of
freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RROD Structural Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between
two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is
specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree
of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of a
single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RSPLINE Structural Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the
displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the
displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam
equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be
specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of degrees
of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary number of
independent nodes (minimum of two) can be specified. Each
independent term consists of a node and a sequence number. The
sequence number is used to order the dependent and independent
terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is that the first
and the last terms in the sequence must be independent terms. A
constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified.
30 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

MPC Type Analysis Type Description


RTRPLT Structural Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate
between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent
terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of
degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent
terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three
independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of
the three nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total
number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is
no constant term for this MPC type.
Cyclic Structural Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of
Symmetry the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such
as “SOL 114,” then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are
created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic
symmetric is chosen, such as “SOL 101,” MPC and SPC entries are
created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis
coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could
erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load and
boundary conditions, as well as element properties.
Sliding Structural Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe
Surface sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN
input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option
automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all
affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of
previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as
element properties.
RBAR1 Structural This is an alternate (simplified) form for RBAR. Creates an
RBAR1 element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes,
with six degrees of freedom at each end. Each dependent term
consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the
independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of
freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal expansion
coefficient, ALPHA.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 31
Finite Elements

MPC Type Analysis Type Description


RTRPLT1 Structural Alternative format to define a rigid triangular plate element
connecting three grid points. Creates an RTRPLT1 element, which
defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Each
dependent term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom,
while the independent term consists only of the node (with all six
degrees of freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal
expansion coefficient, ALPHA.
RJOINT Structural Creates an RJOINT element, which defines a rigid joint element
connecting two coinciding grid points. Each dependent term
consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the
independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of
freedom implied). There is no constant term for this MPC type.

Degrees of Freedom
Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid degrees
of freedom is displayed on the form.
The following degrees of freedom are supported by the Patran MD Nastran MPCs for the various analysis
types:

Degree of freedom Analysis Type


UX Structural
UY Structural
UZ Structural
RX Structural
RY Structural
RZ Structural

Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for
an MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only
to solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom.
However, Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this
node when defining an MPC.

Explicit MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran MPC Bulk Data entry.
The difference in explicit MPC equations between Patran and MD Nastran will result in the A1 field of
the MD Nastran entry being set to -1.0.
32 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

Holds the dependent term


information. This term will
define the fields for G1 and
C1 on the MPC entry. Only
one node and DOF
combination may be defined
for any given explicit MPC.
The A1 field on the MPC entry
is automatically set to -1.0.

Holds the independent


term information. These
terms define the Gi, Ci,
and Ai fields on the MPC
entry, where i is greater
than one. As many
coefficient, node, and
DOF combinations as
desired may be defined.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 33
Finite Elements

Rigid (Fixed)
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data
entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456.

Holds the dependent


term information. This
term defines the GMi
fields on the RBE2
entry. As many nodes
as desired may be
selected as dependent
terms.

Holds the independent


term information. This
term defines the GN
field on the RBE2
entry. Only one node
may be selected.
34 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RBAR MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBAR Bulk Data entry
and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Dependent Terms and the
Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes,
Chapter 2: Building A Model 35
Finite Elements

however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then there must be an overlap in
the list of referenced nodes.

Holds the dependent


term information.
Either one or two
nodes may be
defined as having
dependent terms.
The Nodes define the
GA and GB fields on
the RBAR entry. The
DOFs define the
CMA and CMB fields.

Holds the
independent term
information. Either
one or two nodes
may be defined as
having independent
terms.The Nodes
define the GA and
GB fields on the
RBAR entry.The
DOFs define the CNA
and CNB fields.
36 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RBE1 MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE1 Bulk Data entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 37
Finite Elements

Holds the dependent


term information.
Defines the GMi and
CMi fields on the RBE1
entry. An unlimited
number of nodes and
DOFs may be defined
here.

Holds the
independent term
information. Defines
the GNi and CNi
fields on the RBE1
entry. The total
number of Node/DOF
pairs defined must
equal 6, and be
capable of
representing any
general rigid body
motion.
38 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RBE2 MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent


term information. This
term defines the GMi
and CM fields on the
RBE2 entry. As many
nodes as desired may
be selected as
dependent terms.

Holds the independent


term information. This
term defines the GN field
on the RBE2 entry. Only
one node may be
selected.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 39
Finite Elements

RBE3 MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MD Nastran RBE3 Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent


term information.
Defines the GMi and CMi
fields on the RBE3 entry.
The first dependent term
will be treated as the
reference node,
REFGRID and REFC.
The rest of the
dependent terms
become the GMi and
CMi components.

Holds the independent


term information.
Defines the Gi, j, Ci,
and WTi fields on the
RBE3 entry.
40 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RROD MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RROD Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent


term information.
Defines the GB and
CMB on the RROD
entry. Only one
translational DOF may
be referenced for this
entry.

Holds the independent


term information.
Defines the GA field on
the RROD entry. The
CMA field is left blank.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 41
Finite Elements

RSPLINE MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data
entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC type is typically used to
tie together two dissimilar meshes.

Holds the
dependent term
information.

Holds the independent


term information. Terms
with the highest and
lowest sequence numbers
must be independent.

Determines
what sequence
the independent
and dependent
terms will be
written to the
RSPLINE entry.
42 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RTRPLT MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data
entry.

Holds the dependent


term information.
Defines the GA, GB,
GC, CMA, CMB, and
CMC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.

Holds the independent


term information. The
total number of nodes
referenced in both the
dependent terms and
the independent terms
must equal three.
There must be exactly
six independent
degrees of freedom,
and they must be
capable of describing
rigid body motion.
Defines the GA, GB,
GC, CNA, CNB, and
CNC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 43
Finite Elements

Cyclic Symmetry MPCs


The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and CYSYM
entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters, 267, or into SPC and MPC
entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.

If the type selected is Cyclic


Symmetry, the type of
symmetry will always be
rotational.
NOTE: MPC option will
automatically overwrite the
analysis coordinate
references on all the nodes
belonging to the Dependent
and Independent Regions.
Be careful that this does not
erroneously change the
meaning of previously
applied loads and boundary
conditions, or element
properties.

Any node lying on the Z axis


will be automatically written to
the CYAX entry.

Side 2 of the CYJOIN


entries.

Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries.


44 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

Sliding Surface MPCs


The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the NASTRAN
input file.

If a Sliding Surface type is used,


note that this MPC option will
automatically overwrite the analysis
coordinate references on all the
nodes belonging to the Dependent
and Independent Regions. Be
careful that this does not
erroneously change the meaning of
previously applied loads and
boundary conditions, or element
properties.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 45
Finite Elements

RBAR1 MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RBAR1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBAR1 Bulk Data
entry..
46 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

RTRPLT1 MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RTRPLT1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT1 Bulk Data
entry..
Chapter 2: Building A Model 47
Finite Elements

RJOINT MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements
form and RJOINT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RJOINT Bulk Data
entry..
48 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Finite Elements

Superelements
In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller
pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by reducing their stiffness
matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to
solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to create a Patran group (using
Group/Create) that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite
Elements application on the Create/ Superelement form.

List of existing
superelements.

The group containing all the


elements that define a
superelement. Note that the group
must contain elements not just
nodes. If a group does not contain
elements, it will not show up in the
Element Definition Group listbox.

Brings up an optional subordinate


form that allows a user to select
boundary nodes of the
superelement. By default, the
common nodes between the
elements in the group and the rest of
the model are selected as the
boundary nodes.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 49
Finite Elements

Select Boundary Nodes

Allows for manual selection of


boundary nodes.

Remove selected nodes from the


Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Add selected nodes to the Selected


Boundary Nodes box.
50 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

2.6 Material Library


The Materials form appears when the Material toggle, located on the Patran application selections, is
chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and
ultimately, which Nastran material will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material property
definitions supported by the Nastran Preference.
Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up are
translated. References to externally defined materials result in special comments in the input Nastran file,
e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in Patran.
The forward translator performs material type conversions when needed. This applies to both constant
material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional
orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements is converted into a three-dimensional
anisotropic material.

Materials Application Form


This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to provide
options to create the various Nastran materials.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 51
Material Library

This toggle defines the basic material


directionality and can be set to
Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D
Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3D
Anisotropic, or Composite. For
Explicit Nonlinear additional materials
can be defined.

Lists the existing materials with the


specified directionality.

Defines the material name. A unique


material ID will be assigned during
translation.

Describes the material that is being


created.

Generates a form that is used to


define the material properties. See
Material Input Properties Form, 52.

Generates a form that is used to indicate the active


portions of the material model. By default, all
portions of a created material model are active.
52 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Material Input Properties Form


The Input Properties form is the form where all constitutive material models are defined for each material
created. Multiple constitutive models can be created for each material created by pressing the Apply
button on the main Materials form with the proper widgets set on this form. Multiple constitutive models
of the same type are not allowed. The list of existing constitutive models are shown in the bottom list
box. A list of valid constitutive models is given in the table below.
Set the Constitutive Model
here. Press the Apply
button on the main
Materials application form
to create a constitutive
model for the given
material. Multiple
constitutive models can be
created for the same
material.

Enter the property values in


the databoxes. If a value
can be temperature, model,
strain rate, or strain
dependent, a separate
listbox will appear to select
a field. These fields must be
created in the Fields
application as Material type
fields.

This is a list of current


constitutive models. Use the
Change Material Status
button to turn them on/off
from translation into the
Nastran input deck.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 53
Material Library

Material Constitutive Models


The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


Isotropic • Linear Elastic
• Nonlinear Elastic
• Hyperela • Nearly • Test Data • Mooney Order:
stic Incompressible Rivlin
1

3
• Coefficients • Mooney Order:
Rivlin
1
• Ogden
• Foam 2
• Arruda-Boyce
3
• Gent
4

5
• Elastoplastic • Stress/Strain • von Mises • Isotropic
Curve • Tresca • Kinematic
• Mohr- • Combined
Coulomb
• Drucker-
Prager
54 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Parabolic • Isotropic • Piecewis
Mohr- • Kinematic e
Colomb Linear
• Combined
• Buyukoztu • Cowper-
rk Symon
Concrete ds
• Oak
Ridge
National
Labs
• 2-1/4 Cr-
Mo
ORNL
• Reversed
Plasticit
y ORNL
• Fully
Alpha
Reset
ORNL
• Generalize
d
Plasticit
y
• None • Power Law
• Power Rate Law
• Johnson-Cook
• Kumar
• Hardening • von • Isotropic
Slope Mises • Kinematic
• Tresca • Combined
• Mohr-
Coulom
b
• Drucker-
Prager
Chapter 2: Building A Model 55
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Perfectly • Parabolic • None • Piecewis
Plastic Mohr- e
Colomb Linear
• Buyukoztu • Cowper-
rk Symon
Concrete ds
• Oak
Ridge
National
Labs
• 2-1/4 Cr-
Mo
ORNL
• Reversed
Plasticit
y ORNL
• Fully
Alpha
Reset
ORNL
• Generalize
d
Plasticit
y
• Rigid • None • Power Law
Plastic • Power Rate Law
• Johnson-Cook
• Kumar
Piecewise- Piecewise
Linear Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
• Failure • n/a
• Hill
• Hoffman
• Tsai-Wu
• Maximum Strain
56 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Failure1/ • Maximum • No Progressive
2/3 Stress • Standard
• Maximum • Gradual Selective
Strain
• Immediate Selective
• Hoffman
• Hill
• Tsai-Wu
• Hashin
• Puck
• Hashin-
Tape
• Hashin-
Fabric
• User
Defined
Failure
• Creep • Tabular Input
• Creep Law 111
• Creep Law 112
• Creep Law 121
• Creep Law 122
• Creep Law 211
• Creep Law 212
• Creep Law 221
• Creep Law 222
• Creep Law 300
• MATVP
• Viscoelas • No Function
tic • Williams-Landel-Ferry
• Power Series Expansion
2D • Linear Elastic
Orthotro
pic
Chapter 2: Building A Model 57
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Failure • Stress • n/a
• Strain • Hill
• Hoffman
• Tsai-Wu
• Maximum Strain
• Failure1/ • See Isotropic Entry
2/3
• Elastopla • Stress/Strain • von • Isotropic • Piecewis
stic Curve Mises • Kinematic e
• Tresca Linear
• Combined
• Mohr- • Cowper-
Coulom Symon
b ds

• Drucker-
Prager
• Oak
Ridge
National
Labs
• 2-1/4 Cr-
Mo
ORNL
• Reversed
Plasticit
y ORNL
• Fully
Alpha
Reset
ORNL
• Generalize
d
Plasticit
y
58 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Hardening • von • Isotropic
Slope Mises • Kinematic
• Tresca • Combined
• Mohr-
Coulom
b
• Drucker-
Prager
• Perfectly • von • None • Piecewis
Plastic Mises e
• Oak Linear
Ridge • Cowper-
National Symon
Labs ds
• 2-1/4 Cr-
Mo
ORNL
• Reversed
Plasticit
y ORNL
• Fully
Alpha
Reset
ORNL
• Generalize
d
Plasticit
y
• Creep • MATVP
• Viscoelas • See Isotropic Entry
tic
3D • Linear Elastic
Orthotro
pic
• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry
stic
• Failure1/ • See 2D Orthotropic Entry
2/3
• Creep • See 2D Orthotropic Entry
Chapter 2: Building A Model 59
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Viscoelas • See Isotropic Entry
tic
2D • Linear Elastic
Anisotro
pic
• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry
stic
• Failure • See Isotropic Entry
• Failure1/ • See Isotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported
2/3
3D • Linear Elastic
Anisotro
pic
• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry
stic
• Failure1/ • See 2D Orthotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported
2/3
• Creep • See Isotropic Entry
Fluid • Linear Elastic
Composi • Laminate
te • Rule of Mixtures
• HAL Cont. Fiber
• HAL Disc. Fiber
• HAL Cont. Ribbon
• HAL Disc. Ribbon
• HAL Particulate
• Short Fiber 1D
• Short Fiber 2D
60 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Additional materials for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) are listed in the following table.

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


Isotropic • Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic • Solid
(MAT1) • Fluid
• Elastoplastic • Plastic • Bilinear
Kinematic(MAT
3)
• Iso.Elastic
Plastic(MAT12)
• Rate Dependent
(MAT19)
• Piecewise Linear • Biliear • Cowper Symonds
(MAT24) • Linearized • General
• Table
• Rate Sensitive • Powerlaw
(MAT64)
• Resultant (MAT28)
• Shape Memory (MAT30)
• With Failure (MAT13)
• Power Law (MAT18)
• Ramberg-Osgood (MAT80)
• Hydro (MAT10) • Linearized
• Viscoelastic • Viscoelastic (MAT6)
• Rigid • Material Type 20 • No Constraints
• Global Directions
• Local Directions
• MATRIG (Rigid • Geometry • No Constraints
Body Properties) • Defined • Global Directions
• Local Directions
• Johnson Cook • Material Type 15 • No • Minimum Pressure
iteractions • No Tension, Min. Stress
• Accurate • No Tension, Min.
Pressure
Chapter 2: Building A Model 61
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Rubber • Frazer Nash • Coefficient • Respect
(MAT31) • Least Square • Ignore
Fit
• Blatz-Ko (MAT7)
• General Viscoelastic (MAT76)
• Cellular Rubber (MAT87)
• Mooney Rivlin • Coeff.
(MAT27) • Least Square
• Arruda-Boyce
(MAT127)
• Hyperelastic • Coefficients
(MAT77) • Least Square Fit 1/2/3
• Simplified • Tension- • True Strain • Simple
Compresion • Engineering Average
Load Strain Rate • 12 Point
• Compression Average
Load
• Tension-
Compressio
n Identical
• Foam • Soil and Foam • Active • Allow Crushing
(MAT5/14) (MAT14) • Reversible
• Inactive
(MAT 5)
• Low Density • Bulk • No Tension
Urethane Viscosity • Maintain Tension
(MAT57) Inactive
• Fu Chang Foam • Bulk
(MAT83) Viscosity
Active
• Low Density • Bulk • No • With
Urethane Viscosity Tension Relaxati
(MAT57) Inactive • Maintain on curve
• Bulk Tension • No
Viscosity Relaxati
Active on Curve
62 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Viscous Foam (MAT62)
• Crushable (MAT63)
• Elastoviscoplatic • With Damage • Strain • Bilinear • Cowper
(MAT81) Damage • Linearized Symond
• Orthotropic s
• Table
• RCDC • General

• Discrete Beam • Nonlinear Elastic Discrete Beam (MAT67)


• Nonlinear Plastic Discrete Beam (MAT68)
• Side Impact Dummy (SID) Damper Discrete Beam (MAT69)
• Hydraulic Gas Damper Discrete Beam (MAT70)
• Cabel Discrete Beam (MAT71)
• Elastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT74)
• Elastic 6 DOF Spring Discrete Beam (MAT93)
• Inelastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT94)
• Inelastic 6 DOF Srping Discrete Beam (MAT95)
• General Joint Discrete Beam (MAT97)
• Spring Damper • Nonlinear 6 • Follow Loading Curve
DOF Discrete • Follow Unloading Curve
Beam (MAT119)
• Follow Unloading Stiffness
• General
Nonlinear 1 • Follow Quadratic Unloading
DOF Discrete
Beam (MAT121)
• Elastic Spring (MATDS01)
• Viscous Damper (MATDS02)
• Elastic Spring (MATDS03)
• Nonlinear Elastic Spring (MATDS04)
• Nonlinear Viscous Damper (MATDS05)
• General Nonlinear Spring (MATDS06)
• Spring Maxwell (MATDS07)
• Inelastic Spring (MATDS08)
• Tri-linear Degrading (MATDS13)
• Squat Shear Wall (MATDS14)
• Muscle (MATDS15)
Chapter 2: Building A Model 63
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


• Seat Belt • Seat Belt (MATB01)
• Spotweld • MATDSW1 • DF
• MATDSW2 • DFRES
• DFRESNF
• DFRESNFP
• MATDSW3 • DFSTR
• MATDSW4 • DFRATE
• MATDSW5 • DFNS
• DFSIF
• DFSTRUC
2D • Glass • Laminated Glass • Glass
Orthotro (Laminated) (MAT32) • Polymer
pic
• Composite • Enh. Composite • Tsai-Wu Theory
Damage • Chang-Chang Theory
• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)
• Composites • Composites and • Zero • 0.0
and Fabrics Fabrics • One • 1.0
(MAT58)
• Two • -1.0
• Three
3D • Honeycomb • Composite • Bulk Viscosity Inactive
Orthotro Honeycomb • Bulk Viscosity Active
pic (MAT26)
• Composite • Composite Damage (MAT22)
• Composite • Faceted
Failure (MAT59) • Ellipsoidal

• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)


• Modified • Modified • Bulk • LCA .LT. • Zero
Honeycomb Honeycomb Viscosity 0 • One
(MAT126) Inactive • LCA .GT. • Two
• Bulk 0
Viscosity
Active
64 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5


2D • Viscoplastic • Viscoplastic • Shell • From Curve
Anisotro (MAT103) • Manual Entry
pic
• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)
3D • Viscoplastic • Viscoplastic • Brick • From Curve
Anisotro (MAT103) • Manual Entry
pic
• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)

Linear Elastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for linear elastic properties. The translator produces
MAT1 entries for isotropic materials, MAT8 entries for 2D orthotropic materials, MAT3 entries using
axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries using 3D solid elements (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA)
for 3D orthotropic materials, MAT2 entries for 2D plane stress - 2D anisotropic materials, and MAT9
entries for 3D anisotropic materials. For temperature dependencies, the corresponding MATTi entries are
written referencing TABLEMi entries. Temperature dependency is defined using material fields defined
under the Fields application. SOL 600 jobs using 3D Orthotropic material the MATORT entry is written.

Isotropic Description
Elastic Modulus Elastic modulus, E, (Young’s modulus). Can be temperature
dependent.
Poisson Ratio Poisson’s ratio (NU). Can be temperature dependent. Should be
between -1.0 and 0.5.
Shear Modulus Shear modulus (G). Can be temperature dependent.
Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Thermal coefficient of expansion (A). Can be temperature
dependent.
Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature
dependent.
Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

2D/3D Orthotropic Description


Elastic Modulus ii Modulus of elasticity in 1-, 2-, and 3-directions. Can be
temperature dependent.
Poisson Ratio ij Poisson’s ratio for uniaxial loading in the three different
directions. Can be temperature dependent.
Shear Modulus ij In-plane and transverse shear moduli in ij planes. Can be
temperature dependent.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 65
Material Library

2D/3D Orthotropic Description


Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ii Thermal coefficients of expansion in the three directions. Can be
temperature dependent.
Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature
dependent.
Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

2D/3D Anisotropic Description


Stiffness ij Elements of the 6x6 symmetric material property matrix in the
material coordinate system. Can be temperature dependent.
Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ij Thermal coefficients of expansion. Can be temperature
dependent.
Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature
dependent.
Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

Nonlinear Elastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for nonlinear elastic properties. Use this form to define
the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields
application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 of
type NLELAST and TABLES1 entries. This is used primarily for SOL 106 and 129. This option is not
supported by SOL 600. Use an elastoplastic constitutive model instead.

Isotropic Description
Stress/Strain Curve Defines the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve. You must select
a field from the listbox. It can be strain and/or temperature
dependent. Tabular definition of the stress-strain curve via the
Fields application using a material field of strain should follow
the specifications as outlined by Nastran. The first point of the
material field should be the origin and the second point must be at
the initial yield point. This material curve is elastic, meaning that
in both loading and unloading the material behavior follows the
stress-strain curve as defined. It is not recommended that both
nonlinear elastic and elastoplastic constitutive models be active or
defined for the same material. For work hardening, use the
Elastoplastic constitutive model. See the Nastran Quick
Reference Guide for more details.
66 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Hyperelastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for hyperelastic properties. Use this form to define the
data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries
or on the MATHE entry for SOL 600.
If you select Test Data as the Data Type, the Input Options form reverts to the form used for non-SOL
600 solutions and data is placed on a MATHP entry (Mooney-Rivlin strain energy model). To use test
data for MATHE/SOL 600 runs, use the Experimental Data Fitting features under the Tools menu to
determine the coefficients and enter them manually.

Test Data - Mooney Rivlin Description


Tension/Compression TAB1 All data provided must reference a strain dependent
Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 field defining the test data. Please refer to the
Nastran Quick Reference Guide for descriptions of
Simple Shear Data TAB3 each of these tabular inputs.
Pure Shear Data TAB4
Pure Volume Compression TABD

If Coefficients is selected as the Data Type, use the form to describe the strain energy potential. The
Mooney Rivlin model can be written out as a MATHP or MATHE entry for SOL 600. Make sure you use
the one that is consistent with the solution to be run. Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce, and Gent models are
used for SOL 600 MATHE entries only.

Mooney Rivlin (MATHP) Description


Distortional Deformation Coefficients, Aij Material constants related to distortional
deformation. The Order of the Polynomical
determines the number of coefficients required as
input.
Volumetric Deformation Coefficients, Di Material constants related to volumetric
deformation. The Order of the Polynomial
determines the number of coefficients required as
input.
Density RHO Defines the mass density which is an optional
property.
Volumetric Thermal Expansion Coefficient AV Coefficient of volumetric thermal expansion.
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 67
Material Library

Mooney Rivlin (MATHE) Description


Strain Energy Function Strain energy densities as a function of the strain
C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 invariants in the material. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field. This
option consolidates several of the hyperelastic
material models, including Neo-Hookean (C10
only), Mooney-Rivlin (C10 & C01), and Full Third
Order Invariant (all coefficients).
Density RHO Defines the mass density
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.

Ogden Description
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Density RHO Defines the material mass density.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
Expansion expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Modulus k k in the Ogden equation. The number of
moduli required as input is dependent on the Order
of the Polynomial.
Exponent k k in the Ogden equation. The number of
exponents required as input is dependent on the
Order of the Polynomial.

Foam Description
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Density RHO Defines the material mass density.
68 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Foam Description
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Modulus n un in the Foam equation. The number of moduli
required as input is dependent on the Order of the
Polynomial.
Deviatoric Exponent n n in the Foam equation. The number of
exponents required as input is dependent on the Order
of the Polynomial.
Volumetric Exponent n n in the Foam equation. The number of
exponents required as input is dependent on the Order
of the Polynomial.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 69
Material Library

Arruda- Boyce Description


NKT Chain density times Boltzmann constant times
temperature. May vary with temperature via a
defined material field.
Chain Length Average chemical chain cross length. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Density RHO This defines the material mass density.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.

Gent Description
Tensile Modulus Defines standard tension modulus (E). May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.

I 1* Maximum 1st Invariant Defines *


I1 = I1 – 3 . May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Density RHO This defines the material mass density.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.
Expansion
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.

Elastoplastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for elastoplastic properties. Use this form to define the
data describing plastic behavior of a material. The stress-strain curve data is input via a material property
field of strain and placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. The data input should be the true equivalent
stress vs. equivalent total strain. Other options are placed on the MATEP entry and are valid only for SOL
70 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

400 & 600. Note that the existence of both an elastoplastic and nonlinear elastic constitutive models in
the same material is not recommended.

Stress/Strain Curve Description


Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:

von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & Drucker-


Prager supported on MATS1 entry. All others are for
SOL 600 and placed on the MATEP entry. SOL 400
only supports von Mises.
Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,
Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic
and are placed on the MATS1 entry or MATEP entry
depending on solution sequence and yield function
selected. Hardening rules Power Law, Rate Power
Law, Johnson-Cook, Kumar are available when no
Yield Function is specified. This is used for SOL
600 only on MATEP entry.
Strain Rate Method Selects an option for strain-rate dependent yield
stress used in SOL 600. Cowper-Symonds requires
input of Denominator C and Inverse Exponent P.
Stress/Strain Curve This data must reference a strain dependent field. It
can also be temperature and strain rate dependent.
LIMIT1 in MATS1 determined from supplied
tabular field of stress-strain curve. Data is placed on
TABLES1 entry.
Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager
yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.
Yield Point Initial yield stress.

Stress at Yield
Beta Parameter beta for parabolic Mohr-Coulomb or
Buyukozturk concrete models. Placed on the
MATEP entry.
10th Cycle Yield Stress Equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress for Oak
Ridge National Labs models (ORNL). Placed on the
MATEP entry.
Denominator C Constants for the Cowper-Symonds strain rate
method.
Inverse Exponent P
Chapter 2: Building A Model 71
Material Library

Stress/Strain Curve Description


Coefficient A / B / C / Bi Coefficient and exponent data for Power Law, Rate
Power Law, Johnson-Cook, and Kumar hardening
Exponent M / N rules.
initial Strain Rate Additional data input for the Johnson-Cook
hardening rule.
Room Temperature

Melt Temperature

Hardening Slope Description


Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:

von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & Drucker-


Prager supported on MATS1 entry.
Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,
Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic
and are placed on the MATS1 entry.
Strain Rate Method No strain rate methods are available for the
Hardening Slope data.
Hardening Slope Work hardening slope (H) - slope of stress versus
plastic strain. Defined in units of stress. For an
elastic-perfectly plastic case, use the Perfectly
Plastic data input option.
Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager
yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.
Yield Point Initial yield stress.

Perfectly Plastic Description


Yield Function See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. All
options are identical except there must be a yield
function selected.
Hardening Rule None are available since no hardening is possible
for a perfectly plastic material.
Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are
available.
72 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Perfectly Plastic Description


Yield Point Initial yield stress.
All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above.

Rigid Plastic Description


Yield Function No yield functions are available as the material is
defined as rigid and then plastic, so no yield is
possible.
Hardening Rule See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. Valid
options are the Power Law, Power Rate Law,
Johnson-Cook, Kumar, and Piecewise Linear.
Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available
only if the Piecewise Linear hardening rule is
selected.
Stress/Strain Curve Necessary only when not using one of the power
law hardening rules (Piecewise-Linear). This data
must reference a strain dependent field. It can also
be temperature and strain rate dependent. LIMIT1
in MATS1 determined from supplied tabular field of
stress-strain curve. Data is placed on TABLES1
entry.
All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above. Rigid Plastic is only used in
SOL 600 and only for isotropic materials.

See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about the necessary data for MATS1 and
MATEP entries.

Failure
The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models. Note that this failure model
is for non-SOL 400/600/700 solutions. See Failure 1/2/3 for SOL 400/600/700.

No Composite Failure Theory Description


Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear
Compression Stress Limit used to compute margins of safety in certain
elements. They have no effect on the computational
Shear Stress Limit procedures.
Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in
the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8
entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 73
Material Library

Composite Failure Theory: Description

Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum


Failure Limits For 2D orthotropic on the MAT8 entry, the limits
can be defined as stress or strain allowables. This is
not applicable to isotropic and anisotropic
materials.
Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear are
Compression Stress Limit the same as those defined for non-composite failure.

Shear Stress Limit


Bonding Shear Stress Limit Allowable shear stress of the bonding material. SB
field on the PCOMP entry.
Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in
the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8
entry unless composites are being used in which case the data is written to the PCOMP entry as
necessary.

Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3


The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models used in SOL 400 and 600.
Solution sequences other than SOL 400/600/700 should use the Failure constitutive model above instead.
Up to three failure constitutive models can be defined for any one material. Failure 1 must exist in order
for Failure 2 and 3 to be recognized and translated into the proper MATF and MATTF entries.
Temperature dependent properties as defined by material fields are translated onto the MATTF entry.
Note also that only Failure 1 allows for definition of progressive failure. Failure models 2 and 3 take on
whatever progressive failure is defined in Failure 1. Different failure criterion may exist between all three
in the same material definition.
The table below outlines the allowable properties. All values are real, 0.0, or left blank with no defaults
unless otherwise indicated. Which properties are available is dependent on the Failure Criterion selected.
The following Failure Criteria are available:
• Maximum Stress
• Maximum Strain
• Hill
• Hoffman
• Tsai-Wu
• Hashin
• Puck
• Hashin-Tape
74 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

• Hashin-Fabric
Property Description
Progressive Failure Options Progressive failure options are None, standard
Progressive Failure, Gradual or Immediate selective
progressive failure for SOL 600. SOL 400 does not
support progressive failure models and will ignore
this setting if set to anything other than None. Only
failure indices are computed when no progressive
failure is specified. Anisotropic materials do not
support progressive failure.
Tension Stress Limit X / Y /Z Tension, compression, and shear stress or strain
Tension Strain Limit X / Y / Z limits used in the Maximum Stress or Strain, Hill,
Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu failure criteria.
Compression Stress Limit X / Y / Z
Compression Strain Limit X / Y / Z

Shear Stress Limit XY / YZ / ZX


Shear Strain Limit XY / YZ / ZX
Shear Stress Bond (SB) Allowable shear stress of bonding material between
layers for composites only. This is used in SOL 600
only and is ignored for SOL 400.
Failure Index Failure index used for Hill, Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu
criteria.
Interactive Strength XY / YZ / ZX Interactive strength constants for specified plane
used in the Tsai-Wu criterion.
Max Fiber / Matrix Tension Definable stress limits for Hashin, Puck, Hashin-
Max Fiber / Matrix Compression Tape, and Hashin-Fiber criteria.

Max Tape Fiber Tension


Max Tape Fiber Compression

Max 1st Fiber Tension / Compression


Max 2nd Cross Fiber Tension / Compression

Max Thickness Tension


Max Thickness Compression
Layer Shear Strength Shear stress limits for Hashing, Puck, Hashin-Tape,
Transverse Shear Strength YZ / ZX and Hashin-Fiber criteria.
Slope P12C / P12T / P23C / P23T of Fracture Slopes of the failure envelope used in Puck failure
Envelope criterion.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 75
Material Library

Property Description
Deactivate Tension X / Y/ Z If any value other than blank or 0.0 is entered for
Deactivate Compress X / Y / Z progressive failure options Gradual and Immediate,
Deactivate Shear XY / YZ / ZX failed elements are deactivated (placed ICi fields in
MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Reference
Deactivate Elements Guide for information.

Deactivate Fiber / Matrix Tension


Deactivate Fiber /Matrix Compression
Deactivate Matrix Tension
Deactivate Matrix Compression
Residual Stiffness Factor Reduction fractions or factors. Values can be
Matrix Compression Factor between 0.0 and 1.0. Used only for Gradual or
Shear Stiffness Factor Immediate progressive failure modes (placed on Ai
E33 Fiber Failure Factor fields in MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick
Shear Fiber Failure Factor Reference Guide for more information.

Creep
The Input Properties form displays the following for creep models.

Tabular Input Description


Data defined by the use of this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary
damping for a creep model with tabular input appears on the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only
isotropic materials use this data input method.

Creep Law ijk Description


Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available appears on
the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only isotropic materials use this creep definition.

MATPV Description
Use this form to define either the coefficients and exponents for creep model or provide tabular field
data to define Temperature vs. Creep Strain, Creep Strain Rate vs. Stress, Strain Rate vs. Creep Strain,
or Time vs. Creep Strain in SOL 600 runs. This data is written to the MATVP entry. If tabular data is
provided, this data is written to TABLEM1 entries. It is not recommended to mix the exponents and
coefficients and tabular data. Use one or the other.
76 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Material Library

Viscoelastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for viscoelastic models. This material model is only
used in SOL 600 runs and all data is placed on the MATVE, MATTVE entries. Linear elastic or
hyperelastic constitutive models for isotropic or anisotropic materials must exist in addition to the
viscoelastic model.

Composite
The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of materials. All the
composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homogeneous elastic
material in MD Nastran.
When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then referenced in
a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, a PCOMP entry is created. However,
if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region, for example, “Revised or
Standard Homogeneous Plate,” then the equivalent homogeneous material properties are used instead of
the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be
referenced by a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region. Refer to Composite
Materials Construction (p. 112) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Laminated
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form,
Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the
laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced in a “Revised or
Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, then an MD Nastran PCOMP entry containing the
lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any other type of element property region,
the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material are used
The difference between the "Total" option and the "Total - %thicknesses" option is that the former
requires that the user give actual thickness values of each ply and the latter requires each ply thickness
to be given as a percentage of the total layup thickness. This is the prefered method when applying the
composite material to solid (CHEXA) elements or 2D solid element (axisymmetric, plane strain).
Chapter 2: Building A Model 77
Material Library

.
78 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

2.7 Element Properties


The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the Patran main
form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element properties. The
selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which element property form appears,
and ultimately, which MD Nastran element will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the element
property definitions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference.

Element Properties Form


This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option menus
on this form. Each will determine which MD Nastran element type will be created and which property
forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this section. For a full
description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 63) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 79
Element Properties

Use this option menu to define the


element’s dimension. The options are:

0D (point elements)
1D (bar elements)
2D (tri and quad elements)
3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)

This option menu depends on the


selection made in the Dimension option
menu. Use this menu to define the
general type of element, such as:
Mass versus Grounded Spring
Shell versus 2D_Solid

This button is used to quickly edit an


element property; for example change
the shell thickness.

These option menus may or may not be


present, and their contents depend
heavily on the selections made in
Dimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for
more help.

This is used to specify element


properties; for example shell thickness,
or material orientation.
This is used to specify the region
(area) of geometry or elements that
are to be included in the property
definition.
80 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural.

Table 2-1 Structural Options


Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2
0D • Mass • Coupled
• Grounded
• Lumped
• Grounded Spring
• Grounded Damper
• Grounded Bush
1D • Beam • General Section • Standard
• P-Formulation
• Curved w/General
Section
• Curved w/Pipe
Section
• Lumped Section
• Tapered Section • Standard
• P-element
• General Section •
(CBEAM)
• Rod • General Section • Standard
• CONROD
• Pipe Section
• Spring
• Damper • Scalar
• Viscous
• Gap • Adaptive
• Non-Adaptive
• 1D Mass
• PLOTEL
• Bush
• Spot Weld Connector
• Fastener Connector
Chapter 2: Building A Model 81
Element Properties

Table 2-1 Structural Options


Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2
2D • Shell • Homogeneous • Standard
• Revised
• P-element
• Laminate • Standard
• Revised
• Equivalent Section • Standard
• Revised
• P-element
• Field Point Mesh (exterior acoustic element)
• Bending Panel • Standard

• • Revised
• P-element

• • 2D-Solid • Plane Strain • Standard


• Revised
• P-Formulation
• Hyperelastic Formulation
• Axisymmetric • Standard
• Hyperelastic Formulation
• PLPLANE
• Infinite (exterior acoustic element)

• Membrane • Standard
• Revised

• P-Formulation

• • Shear Panel

3D • Solid • Homogeneous • Standard


• P-Formulation
• Hyperelastic Formulation
• Laminate
• Gasket
82 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 0D Mass Coupled Point/1

Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric
point of the structural model.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 83
Element Properties

Defines the
orientation of
the 1-2-3 axes
of the mass
matrix. The
value is a
reference to
an existing
coordinate
frame. The 1-
2-3 axes will
be aligned with
the X-Y-Z axes
of the
specified
coordinate
system. If a
non
rectangular
coordinate
system is
specified, the
system will be
evaluated into
a local
rectangular
system, which
is then used to
orient the
mass matrix.
This property
is the CID field
on the CONM1
entry. This
property is
optional.

Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry
and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties
are optional; however, at least one must be defined.
84 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were not shown on the
previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Mass Component 3,3 Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the
CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or references to
Mass Component 4,1 existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at
Mass Component 4,2 least one must be defined.

Mass Component 4,4

Mass Component 5,1

Mass Component 5,2

Mass Component 5,3

Mass Component 5,4

Mass Component 5,5

Mass Component 6,1

Mass Component 6,2

Mass Component 6,3

Mass Component 6,4

Mass Component 6,5

Mass Component 6,6

Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 0D Mass Grounded Point/1

Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of
the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is defined to be grounded.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 85
Element Properties

Defines the translation mass or rotational


inertia value to be applied. This is the M field Defines which degree of freedom this value
on the PMASS entry. This property can be will be attached to. This property can be set to
either a real value or a reference to an UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the
existing field definition. This property is setting for the C1 field on the CMASS1 entry.
required. This property is required.

Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 0D Mass Lumped Point/1

Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point of the
structural model.
86 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines an offset from the specified node to Defines the translational mass value to be
where the lumped mass actually is to exist in used. This is the M field on the CONM2
the structural mode. This vector is defined in entry. This property can either be a real
the Mass Orientation coordinate system. value or a reference to an existing field
Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the definition. This property is required.
CONM2 entry. This property is optional.

Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the


mass matrix. This is a reference to an existing
coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be
aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified
coordinate system. If a nonrectangular
coordinate system is specified, the system will
Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of be evaluated into a local rectangular system,
this lumped mass. These properties are the Iij which is then used to orient the mass matrix.
fields on the CONM2 record. These values can This is the CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the
be either real values or references to existing Value Type is set to Vector then the
field definitions. These values are optional. components of the vector define the center of
gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate
system and the field for CID is translated as -1.
This property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that were not shown on the
previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 87
Element Properties

Prop Name Description


Inertia 3,1 Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped
mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values
Inertia 3,2 can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.
Inertia 3,3 These values are optional.

Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form when the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 0D Grounded Spring Point/1
88 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property. This
defines a scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other
node is defined to be grounded.

Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the PELAS entry.
This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property
is required.

Number of a User Defined Coordinate


system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear
(SOL 700). This property is optional. Defines what damping
is to be included. This
is the GE field on the
PELAS entry. This
Defines the relationship between the spring property can either be
deflection and the stresses within the a real value or a
spring. This property is the S field on the reference to an
PELAS entry and can either be a real value, existing field
or a reference to an existing field definition. definition. This
This property is optional. property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ,
RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the CELAS1 entry. This
property is required.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 89
Element Properties

Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form when the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 0D Grounded Damper Point/1

Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This
defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other
node is defined to be grounded.

Defines the force per unit velocity value to be


used. This property is the B field on the Defines which degree of freedom this value is
PDAMP entry and can either be a real value to be attached to. This property can be set to
or a reference to an existing field definition. UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting
This property is optional. for the C1 field on the CDAMP1 entry. This
property is required.

Number of a User Defined Coordinate system,


used only for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This
property is optional.
90 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Bush
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element
Properties form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Bush Bar/2
Chapter 2: Building A Model 91
Element Properties

This toggle can also be set to Node Id


or CID..
92 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view
these properties.

Prop Name Description


Bush Orientation System CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The
element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system
principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical
coordinate system, the grid point specified locates the system. If
CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used.
Spring Constant 1 Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of
Spring Constant 2 freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit
Spring Constant 3 displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an
Spring Constant 4
Spring Constant 5 existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Spring Constant 6
Stiff. Freq Depend 1
Stiff. Freq Depend 2
Stiff. Freq Depend 3
Stiff. Freq Depend 4
Stiff. Freq Depend 5
Stiff. Freq Depend 6
Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree
Stiff. Force/Disp 2 of freedom of the spring-damper system.
Stiff. Force/Disp 3
Stiff. Force/Disp 4
Stiff. Force/Disp 5
Stiff. Force/Disp 6
Damping Coefficient 1 Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of
Damping Coefficient 2 freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference
Damping Coefficient 3 to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency
Damping Coefficient 4
Damping Coefficient 5
Damping Coefficient 6
Damp. Freq Depend 1
Damp. Freq Depend 2
Damp. Freq Depend 3
Damp. Freq Depend 4
Damp. Freq Depend 5
Damp. Freq Depend 6
Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient
Struc. Damp Freq Depend (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to
an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.
Stress Recovery Translation Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by
Stress Recovery Rotation multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element
forces.
Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed
Strain Recovery Rotation by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element
strains.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 93
Element Properties

General Section Beam (CBAR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2
94 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be
generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the structural
model.

Note: CBAR entries will include all user input pin flags.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 95
Element Properties

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library
• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions
(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If
Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran’s built-in section library
(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, (for the standard Beam
Library) or PBRSECT/PBMSECT (for an Arbitrary section) will be
used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard
bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the
beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the
Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later.
Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in
the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the
list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the
value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property
is required.
Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any
cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY
plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines
the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This
property is required.
• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

Node Id – Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran
global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0
1 0 Coord 5>).
• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar
orientation vector will be written to the CBAR entry:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA

Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the


OFFT value on the CBAR entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be
written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how
the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the
CBAR entry.
96 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam
cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These
Offset @ Node 2 properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,
W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR entry.

These properties are optional.


• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate


System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.
• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset
vectors will be written to the CBAR entry and how the vector input
will be interpreted in Patran:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB

Element - Element Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third


position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the
vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some
other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>).
If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third
position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the
vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.
Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate
system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ,
Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 or any combination. These properties are used to remove
connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at
the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a
pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released.
Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record.
These properties are optional.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on
the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section.
These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values
Inertia 2,2 can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.
Inertia 2,1 These values are optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 97
Element Properties

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references
Shear Stiff, Z to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be
either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of
the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined
Z of Point C in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1,
Y of Point D D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can
be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These
Z of Point D properties are optional.

Y of Point E

Z of Point E

Y of Point F

Z of Point F
[Contact Beam Radius] This allows the equivalent radius for beam-to-beam contact to be
different for each beam cross section. The MD Nastran entry
BCBMRAD is written to the .bdf file. The BCBMRAD entry format
is different for SOL 400 and SOL 600.
[Station Distances] Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are
fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range
of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry.
The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The
alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These
values are real values. These properties are optional.
Create Sections, I C L ..., Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user
Beam Library to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type
and inputing dimensions.
98 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2, Bar/3

P-Formulation Bar/4

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This form defines a
simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis.

Note: .Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this
property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an
asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags
for all elements in the property set.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 99
Element Properties

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will
define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector, which can be defined as
either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane. This defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or
G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.

Allows a beam section


previously created using
the beam library to be
Input Properties selected. When a beam
section is chosen and the
Associate Beam Section
option is toggled, the cross
sectional properties need
not be input on this Input
Properties form.
Defines the material to be
used. A list of all materials
currently in the database is
displayed when data is
entered. Either select from
the list using the mouse, or
type in the name. This
property defines the value
to be used in the MID field
on the PBAR entry. This
property is required.
Allows a user to define a
bar/beam section either by
Dimensions
(PBARL/PBEAML) or by
Properties (PBAR/PBEAM).
If Dimensions is choosen,
the MD Nastran’s built-in
section library (Version 69
and later),
PBARL/PBEAML, will be
used to define the
bar/beam. If Properties is
chosen, the standard
bar/beam properties,
PBAR/PBEAM will be used
to define the beam section.
If the Dimensions Option is
set to Dimensions, the
Translation Parameters
Version must be set to
version 69 or later.

Activates the Beam Library forms. These


forms will allow the user to define beam Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam
properties by choosing a standard cross cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These
section type and inputting dimensions. properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,
W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the
CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate a
system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are
optional.
100 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML
property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on
the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These
are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
Inertia 2,2 either real values or references to existing field definitions. These
Inertia 2,1 values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references
Shear Stiff, Z to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.
This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a
real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the
stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in the
Z of Point C local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2,
X of Point D F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
Y of Point D optional.

X of Point E

Y of Point E

X of Point F

Y of Point F
Station Distances Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are
fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range
of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The
SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate
format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These values are
real values. These properties are optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 101
Element Properties

Prop Name Description


Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-
orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process
will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-
orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID
field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.
By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT
entry.

Curved General Section Beam (CBEND)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam Curved w/General Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam
element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of the bend
and the orientation of that curvature.This element in Patran always uses the method of defining the center
of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element also exists.
102 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by either


specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a
node. The CBEND element in MD Nastran has several ways to define the Defines the cross-sec
radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This defines This property is the A
the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This This value can be eith
property is required. to an existing field def
optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 103
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were
not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
properties.

Prop Name Description


Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These
properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values
Inertia 2,2 can either be real values or references to existing field definitions.
These values are optional.
Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, R Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or
Shear Stiff, Z references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of
the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be
either real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Radial NA Offset Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes.
Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of
curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
R of Point C These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z
coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam,
Z of Point C as defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are
R of Point D the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
Z of Point D definitions. These properties are optional.

R of Point E

Z of Point E

R of Point F

Z of Point F
104 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam Curved W/Pipe Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe
or elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element definition
because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 105
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when Defines the
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID center of
field on the PBEND entry. This property is required. curvature of the
pipe bend. This
can be done
either by
specifying a
vector from the
first node of the
element or by
referencing a
node. The
CBEND
element in MD
Nastran has
several ways to
define the
radius of the
pipe bend and
the orientation
of that
curvature.
Defines the
settings of the
X1, X2, X3, and
G0 fields on the
CBEND entry.
This element in
Patran always
uses the
method of
defining the
center of
curvature point
Indicates the
wall thickness
of the pipe.
This is the t
field on the
PBEND entry.
This value
can be either
a real value or
a reference to
an existing
field
definition.
This property
is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe
cross section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. Indicates the distance from the centroid of
These values can either be real values or references to existing field cross section to mid-wall location. This is t
definitions. These properties are optional. on the PBEND entry. This value can either
value or a reference to an existing field de
This property is required.
106 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were
not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
properties.

Prop Name Description


Internal Pipe Pressure Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P
field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material
of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit
length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This
value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is optional.
Stress Intensification Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This
is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the
PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General,
ASME, and Welding Council.

Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam Lumped Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam
element of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.The orientation vector can
be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 107
Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this
property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an
asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags
for all elements in the property set.
108 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library
• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions
(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If
Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran’s built-in section library
(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the
bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties,
PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the
Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters
Version must be set to version 69 or later.
Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the
database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the
MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.
Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-
sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,
where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines the value
for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is
required.
• Value Type The orientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference
to an existing node in the XY plane.
• Reference Coordinates Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System.

Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System.


Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam
cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These
Offset @ Node 2 properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,
W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On
the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement
coordinate system of the node. In Patran, they are either global, or in a
system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are
optional.
• Value Type Specifies that the offset is defined in terms of a vector.
• Reference Coordinates Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System.

Element - Element Coordinate System.


Chapter 2: Building A Model 109
Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By
default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.
Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type
connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the
element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here
are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties
define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and
are optional.
Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints
and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within
Warp DOF @ Node 2 the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These
properties are optional.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on
the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.
This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can be either
a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property
is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
Shear Stiff, Z to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Y of NSM Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location
of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam
Z of NSM cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1 and M2
fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Symmetry Option Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped
areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter.
The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z
Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the
SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional.
110 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Ys of Lumped Areas Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined in
the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the Yi
Zs of Lumped Areas and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real
values. These properties are optional.
Area Factors Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped
area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If
the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all be
scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for the
Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values.
These properties are optional.

Tapered Beam (CBEAM)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Beam Tapered Bar/2
Chapter 2: Building A Model 111
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a
beam element with varying cross sections.
112 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this
property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an
asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags
for all elements in the property set.

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library
• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions
(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions
is choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and
later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If
Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM
will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set
to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to
version 69 or later.
Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the
database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the
MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.
Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-
sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,
where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any
necessary transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0
fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.
• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

Node Id – Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran
global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0
Coord 5>).
Chapter 2: Building A Model 113
Element Properties

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar
orientation vector will be written to the CBEAM entry:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA

Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the


OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be
written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how
the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the
CBEAM entry.
Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross
section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties,
Offset @ Node 2 after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A,
W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry.

These properties are optional.


• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate System


controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.
• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset
vectors will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input
will be interpreted in Patran:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB

Element - Element Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third


position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the
vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other
Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If
Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third position
of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will
be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.
114 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By
default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.
Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type
connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the
element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here
are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties
define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and
are optional.
Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constraints
and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within
Warp DOF @ Node 2 the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These
properties are optional.
Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties
will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam
length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values
define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. These
values are real values. These properties are optional.
Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines
the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be
either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition. This
property is required.
Inertias 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These
defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry.
Inertias 2,2 These values are real values. These properties are optional.
Inertias 1,2
Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J
fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each
station location. This property is optional.
Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the
shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2,
Zs of C Points E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of real
Ys of D points values, one for each station location. These properties are optional.

Zs of D Points

Ys of E Points

Zs of E Points

Ys of F Points

Zs of F Points
Chapter 2: Building A Model 115
Element Properties

Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a list
of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional.
NSM Inertia @ Node 1 Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length
about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the
NSM Inertia @ Node 2 element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the
PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to
existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NSM @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location
of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam
Z of NSM @ Node 1 cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B),
Y of NSM @ Node 2 and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
Z of NSM @ Node 2 optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
Shear Stiff, Z references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and
S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values
Shear Relief Z or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These
properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These
Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location
of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross section
Z of NA @ Node 1 coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields
Y of NA @ Node 2 on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Z of NA @ Node 2

General Section Beam (CBEAM)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s)


Create 1D Beam General Section (CBEAM)
116 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due to torsion. The
capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the “Tapered Section”
formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 117
Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this
property set and will not export user defined pin flags for nodes which are
shared by two beams sharing the same node.

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library
• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions
(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is
choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and
later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If
Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM
will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set
to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version
69 or later.
Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the
database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID
field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.
Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-
sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,
where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any necessary
transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the
CBEAM entry. This property is required.
• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

Node Id – Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran
global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0
Coord 5>).
118 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar orientation
vector will be written to the CBEAM entry:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA

Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the


OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be
written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how the
input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the CBEAM
entry.
Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross
section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after
Offset @ Node 2 any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B,
W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry.

These properties are optional.


• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

Vector – Specified using a vector

This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate System


controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.
• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset vectors
will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input will be
interpreted in Patran:

Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB

Element - Element Coordinate System

If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third position


of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will
be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other Patran user
defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If Element is specified,
an E will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on
the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in
the Element coordinate system.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 119
Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By
default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.
Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified
degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local
coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,
RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and
PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.
Warping Option This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping SPOINTs
of unmatched ends within the application region (see continuity rules
above). The choices available include “A free B free”,
“A fixed B fixed”, “A free B fixed”, “A fixed B free”, or “None”. The
choice of “None” is used to disable warping altogether for the current
element property set, in which case no SPOINTs will be generated or
constrained. Only unmatched ends within the application region will be
eligible for constraining, and whether or not a constraint is applied will
depend on the option selected, and whether the unmatched end is
“End A” or “End B” of its beam element. If no selection is made for this
element property, “A free B free” is selected by default.
Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These
Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These
values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.
These properties are optional.
Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties
will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam
length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values
define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. This field
consists of a set of real values separated by legal delimiters, such as white
space and/or commas. If this list is entered, then the properties that
follow may also be in the form of lists consisting of the same number of
values. If they are in the form of a single real value, then that value will
apply to all stations of the beam element. This property is optional. If it
is not provided, then all other specified section properties apply to the
entire beam, and lists of values will not be accepted.
Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines the
settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a
real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a reference to
an existing field definition, in which case a single real value will be
evaluated for each element of the application region. This property is
required.
120 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Inertias 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These
Inertias 2,2 values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM
Inertias 1,2 entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam,
or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These
properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be
assumed.
Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J
fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies
to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been
provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will
be assumed.
Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the
Zs of C Points shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2,
Ys of D Points E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single
Zs of D Points
Ys of E Points real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values if a list of
Zs of E Points stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not
Ys of F Points provided, values of 0 will be assumed.
Zs of F Points
Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.
This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value is a
single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if
a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not
provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.
NSM Inertia @ Node 1 Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about
NSM Inertia @ Node 2 the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element.
These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NSM @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the
Z of NSM @ Node 1 location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the
Y of NSM @ Node 2 beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A),
Z of NSM @ Node 2
M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
either real values or references to existing field definitions. These
properties are optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
Shear Stiff, Z fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 121
Element Properties

Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and
Shear Relief Z S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the
Z of NA @ Node 1 location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam
Y of NA @ Node 2 cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and
Z of NA @ Node 2
N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values
or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MD Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping degrees
of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the Patran database, and there is no way to
recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck translation, and provide
the means to communicate to MD Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees
of freedom in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are implied in the Patran database
through the composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected.
These continuity and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This
connection of these attributes to the composition of the application region is new in Patran 2001r3, and
represents a change in behavior from previous versions of Patran. The general rules of implied continuity
are as follows.
1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a GRID ID at an
end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the other beam element.
If a third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GRID ID, it is
assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This condition is known
as a “multiple junction”. Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the application region
contain a matching GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not
continuous. This condition is known as an “unmatched end”.
2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the matching
GRID ID located at “End A” of one of the beam elements and at “End B” of the other. “End A”
and “End B” positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the element
connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coordinate system points
from “End A” to “End B”. If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is
enabled, any violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the
finite element model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly
oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again.
3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an application region
will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the
time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM entries for the appropriate end
of both of the beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end release codes have
been prescribed for the application region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element
continuity. This is new for Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of Patran, end release codes would
be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity.
122 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not
continuous. This applies to both “multiple junctions” and “unmatched ends”.
5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the
application region, whether “multiple junction” or “unmatched end”, with the applied end release
codes dependent on what has been prescribed for “End A” and “End B” for the application region.
If no end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none are generated.
6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions), constraints
applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the “warping option” specified in the element properties
form. For example, if “A free B fixed” has been selected and the unmatched end is “End A” of
its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is “End B” of its element, it will be constrained.
The warping SPOINT for a beam element end involved in a multiple junction will not be
constrained under any circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element
involved in a multiple junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a
way that the beam element end becomes an “unmatched end” within its new application region.
7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping coefficient
at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the “Beam Library” option, values for
the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicitly enabled. If the
user wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choose “None” as
his “Warping Option” on the “Input Properties ...” form.

General Section Rod (CROD)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2

Standard

Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tension-
compression-torsion element of the structural model.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 123
Element Properties
124 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the cross-sectional area of the Defines the material to be used. A list of all
element. This is the A field on the materials currently in the database is displayed
PROD entry. This value can be either a when data is entered. Either select from the list
real value or a reference to an existing using the mouse or type in the name. This defines
field definition. This property is the setting of the MID field on the PROD entry.
required. This property is required.

Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional


stress. This is the C field on the PROD entry. Defines mass not included in the
This property can be either a real value or a mass derived from the material of the
reference to an existing field definition. This element. This property is defined in
property is optional. terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the
PROD entry. This value can be either
a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property
is optional.

Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This


is the J field on the PROD entry. This value can
be either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 125
Element Properties

General Section Rod (CONROD)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2

CONROD

Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-torsion


element of the structural model.
126 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the
setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This property is required.

Defines the cross-


sectional area of
the element. This
property is the A
field on the
CONROD entry.
This value can be
either a real value
or a reference to
an existing field
definition. This
property is
required.

Defines mass not


included in the
mass derived from
the material of the
element. This
property is defined
in terms of mass
per unit length of
the beam and is
the NSM field on
the CONROD
entry. This value
can be either a
real value or a
reference to an
existing field
definition. This
property is
optional.

Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional


stress. This property is the C field on the CONROD
entry and can either be a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property


is the J field on the CONROD entry. This value can either
be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
This property is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 127
Element Properties

Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Rod Pipe Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tension-
compression-torsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.
128 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD and OD2
fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing
field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at
Node 2 Property is optional.

Defines the
material to be
used. A list of all
materials currently
in the database is
displayed when
data is entered.
This property
defines the setting
of the MID field on
the PTUBE entry.
Either select from
the list using the
mouse, or type in
the name. This
property is
required.
Defines mass not
included in the
mass derived
from the material
of the element.
This property is
defined in terms
of mass per unit
length of the
beam and is the
NSM field on the
PRTUBE entry.
This value can be
either a real value
or reference to an
existing field
definition. This
property is
optional.

Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE
entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing
field definition. This property is required.

Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Spring Bar/2
Chapter 2: Building A Model 129
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property.
This defines a scalar spring of the structural model.
130 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the coefficient to be used for this Defines what damping is to be included.
spring. This property is the K field on the This property is the GE field on the PELAS
PELAS entry and can be either a real value entry and can be either a real value or a
or a reference to an existing field definition. reference to an existing field definition. This
This property is required. property is optional.

Defines which
degree of
freedom this
value is to be
attached to at
each node. The
degree of
freedom can be
set to UX, UY,
UZ, RX, RY, or
RZ. These
properties
define the
settings of the
C1 and C2 fields
on the CELAS1
entry. These
properties are
required.

Defines the relationship between the spring Number of a User Defined Coordinate
deflection and the stresses within the spring. system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear
This property is the S field on the PELAS (SOL 700). This property is optional.
entry and can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.

Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 131
Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Damper Scalar Bar/2

Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This
defines a scalar damper element of the structural model.
132 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the force per unit velocity value to


be used. This is the B field on the PDAMP
entry and can either be a real value or a
Number of a User Defined reference to an existing field definition.
Coordinate system, used This property is optional.
only for Explicit Nonlinear
(SOL 700). This property is
optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value


will be attached to at each node. This can be
set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These
define the settings of the C1 and C2 field on
the CDAMP1 entry. These properties are
required.

Viscous Damper (CVISC)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Damper Viscous Bar/2
Chapter 2: Building A Model 133
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper element
of the structural model.

This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This
property can either be a real value or a property can either be a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional. property is optional.

Gap (CGAP)
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Gap Adaptive Bar/2

Nonadaptive

Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional
element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.
134 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the local element


coordinate system for this
element that can be
defined in one of three
ways. If the two end nodes
of the gap are not
coincident, then the Gap
Orientation can reference
a vector or a node ID. This
local x-axis would then run
between the two end
nodes and the orientation
information would define
the local xy plane.
However, if the two end
nodes are coincident, then
the Gap Orientation refers
to an existing coordinate
system definition and will
be used as the local
element coordinate
system. This Gap
Orientation defines the
settings of the X1, X2, X3,
G0, and CID fields on the
CGAP entry. This property
is required.

Defines the initial opening


of the gap element. The
nodal coordinates are
only used to define the
closure direction. This
property is the U0 field on
the PGAP entry and can
be either a real value or a
reference to an existing
field definition. This
property is optional.

Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed.
The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the
surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10
orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the
PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field
definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness
property is optional.

Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for
initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial opening
stiffness will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and
can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a PGAP property that were
not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
Chapter 2: Building A Model 135
Element Properties

properties.

Prop Name Description


Sliding Stiffness Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is
closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Static Friction Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on
the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a
spatially varying real scalar field.
Kinematic Friction Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2
field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar
or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Max Penetration Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the
TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real
scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Max Adjust Ratio Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the
MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real
scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Penet. Lower Bound Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the
TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real
scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Friction Coeff. y Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this
element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2
Friction Coeff. Z fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to
existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D 1D Mass Bar/2
136 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of
the structural model.

Defines the translation mass or rotational Defines which degree of freedom this value
inertia value to be applied. This property is the will be attached to at each node. These can be
M field on the PMASS entry and can either be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines
a real value or a reference to an existing field the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the
definition. This property is required. CMASS1 entry. These properties are required.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 137
Element Properties

PLOTEL
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D PLOTEL Bar/2

Use this form to create a PLOTEL element.

Dummy property data not required to


define the PLOTEL property set.

(Scalar) Bush
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element
Properties form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Bush Bar/2
138 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This toggle can also be set to


Node Id or CID.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 139
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view
these properties.

Prop Name Description


Bush Orientation Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID
is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the
elements grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application
Region). The X-Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush
Orientation. If a vector input is given, these components define an
orientation vector v from the first grid point (GA) of the element in
the displacement coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush
Orientation references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point
forms an orientation vector which extends from the first element
grid point to the orientation point.

If a CID 0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the element


X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal
axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system,
the first elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If
CID = 0, the elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate
System.

If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is along


the line which connects the element’s grid points. The material
property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial
and torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4).
Offset Location Offset Location (0.0 s 1.0) specifies the spring-damper
location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the
fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the spring-
damper.
Offset Orientation System Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the spring-damper
offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB.
Offset Orientation Vector Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the
offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or
blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.
140 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Prop Name Description


Spring Constant 1 Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom.
Spring Constant 2 This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and
Spring Constant 3 can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition
Spring Constant 4
Spring Constant 5 for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Spring Constant 6
Stiff. Freq Depend 1
Stiff. Freq Depend 2
Stiff. Freq Depend 3
Stiff. Freq Depend 4
Stiff. Freq Depend 5
Stiff. Freq Depend 6
Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of
Stiff. Force/Disp 2 freedom of the spring-damper system.
Stiff. Force/Disp 3
Stiff. Force/Disp 4
Stiff. Force/Disp 5
Stiff. Force/Disp 6
Damping Coefficient 1 Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of
Damping Coefficient 2 freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to
Damping Coefficient 3 an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency
Damping Coefficient 4
Damping Coefficient 5
Damping Coefficient 6
Damp. Freq Depend 1
Damp. Freq Depend 2
Damp. Freq Depend 3
Damp. Freq Depend 4
Damp. Freq Depend 5
Damp. Freq Depend 6
Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1).
Struc. Damp Freq Depend This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing
field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.
Stress Recovery Translation Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed by
Stress Recovery Rotation multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element
forces.
Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by
Strain Recovery Rotation multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element
strains.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 141
Element Properties

Spot Weld Connector (CWELD)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Spot Weld Connector
Connector
142 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Note that SPOTWELD properties are created automatically (or pre-existing properties selected) when
creating Spotwelds through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region is required
(or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying spotweld properties
because the existence of the spotweld itself is the application region for the property set.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 143
Element Properties

Fastener Connector (CFAST)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 1D Fastener Connector
Connector
144 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Note that FASTENER properties are created automatically (or pre-existing properties selected) when
creating Fasteners through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region is required
(or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying fastener properties
because the existence of the fastener itself is the application region for the property set.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 145
Element Properties

The formula value can be any of the following:


String
None
Douglas
Huth Hi-Lok in CFRP
Huth Hi-Lok in metal
Huth solid rivet
Note that Douglas or one of several Huth formulations can be used to calculate stiffness values of fastener
connections automatically, minimizing the need for manual calculation.
Stiffness coefficients for the CFAST element are calculated in different steps. Generally, either Douglas
or three derivatives of Huth formulas are used. Regardless of the selected formula, the axial stiffness is
always calculated the same way:

1
E f --- Ãd 2
4 f
k = --------------------
l

The stiffness is inserted into the KT1 parameter of the PFAST entry. The length of the fastener will be
determined by summation of the thickness of the two connected shell elements.
The Douglas formula is*:
1
k = ---
c

5 1 1
c = ---------- + 0.8   ---------- + ----------
df Ef t E t 2 E 2
1 1

The formula according to Huth is*:

k = 1
---
c
a
 t 1 + t 2 1 1 1 1
-   ----------
c = b   -------------- + ---------- + ------------- + -------------
 2d t E t 2 E 2 2E f t 1 2E f t 2
f  1 1

a b
Hi-Lok in CFRP 0.6667 4.2
146 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

a b
Hi-Lok in metal 0.6667 3.0
Solid Rivet 0.4 2.2

In the case of composites, the Douglas and Huth formulas have to be used twice. First, the overall
(engineering) Young’s modulus has to be calculated for both directions (E11 and E22), which then has to
be applied to the formulas. In this case, the shear stillness of the fastener is direction dependent. For
composites or anisotrophic material, the material tensors of the two connected shell elements have to be
transformed into the coordinate system of the CFAST element before the Douglas or Huth formula is
applied. The resulting stiffness is applied to the KT2 and KT3 parameters on the PFAST entry.
* The following symbols are used in the formulas:

Symbol Meaning
Ef Young’s modulus of fastener
df Diameter of fastener
l Length of fastener, evaluated from the FE model
E1 Young’s modulus of first property connected to the fastener
t1 Thickness of first property connected to the fastener
E2 Young’s modulus of second property connected to the fastener
t2 Thickness of second property connected to the fastener

Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4

Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL
property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested
behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 147
Element Properties
148 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the
material to be
used. A list of all
materials currently
in the database is
displayed when
data is entered.
Either select one
from the list using
the mouse or type
in the name. This
defines the
settings of the
MID1, MID2,
MID3, and MID4
fields on the
PSHELL entry.
This property is
required.

Defines the
thickness, which
will be uniform
over each
element. This
value can either
be a real value or
a reference to an
existing field
definition. This
property defines
the T1, T2, T3,
and T4 fields on
the CQUAD4/8
and CTRIA3/6
entries and/or the
T field on the
PSHELL entry.
This property is
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the required.
element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a
vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant
angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This
scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a
reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is
defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 149
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a PSHELL
property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane
defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the
CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the bottom
and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the
Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if
the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the
PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the
PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it
not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or
detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based
on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a
Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution
Type, 366.

Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.
150 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 151
Element Properties

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the
material of the element. This property is defined in terms of
mass per unit area of the element. and this is the NSM field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
152 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,
Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,
P-Formulation Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,
the MD Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 153
Element Properties

Defines the
material to be
used. A list of all
materials
currently in the
database is
displayed when
data is entered.
Either select from
the list using the
mouse or type in
the name. This
property defines
the settings of the
MID1, MID2,
MID3, and MID4
fields on the
PSHELL entry.
This property is
required.

Defines the distance


from the element’s
reference plane to
the top and bottom
most extreme fibers
respectively. These
properties are the
Z1 and Z2 fields on
the PSHELL entry
and can be either
real values or
references to
existing field
definitions. These
properties are
optional.
Defines the mass not included in the Defines a uniform thickness, which will
mass derived from the material of the cover each element. This property defines
element. This property is defined in terms the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
of mass per unit area of the element and CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T
this is the NSM field on the PSHELL field on the PSHELL entry and can be
entry. This value can be either a real either a real value or a reference to
value or a reference to an existing field existing field definition. This property is
definition. This property is optional. required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate
system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of the basic
system.This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This
property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that were not
shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
154 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

properties.

Prop Name Description


Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane
defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the
Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
Maximum P-orders by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-
orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process
will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum
P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in the
error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.
By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate
in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the
EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4

Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8


Chapter 2: Building A Model 155
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP property.

Prop Name Description


Laminate Options Laminate option placed on the LAM field of the PCOMP/PCOMPG
entry. No option implies all plies must be specified and all stiffness
terms developed. MEM - all plies are specified but only membrane
terms are computed. BEND - all plies specified but only bending terms
computed. SMEAR - all plies specified, stacking sequence ignored
and TS/T and 12I/T**3 terms set to zero. SMCORE - all plies
specified with the last ply specifying core properties and the previous
plies specifying face sheet properties. See the Nastran Quick
Reference Guide for more details.
Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based
on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or
if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the
PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the
PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it
not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or
detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based
on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining
a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear
Solution Type, 366.

Note: TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8 entry defined in the
composite, or in other words, from the material of the first ply in the layup. The value of
GE is written to PCOMP as the sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the
percentage thickness of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry,
the 2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to have property
words used to define these values. If the values are not defined then the values are retrieved
from the MAT8 material card.
156 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to


be used. A list of all
materials currently in
the database is
displayed when data is
entered. Either select
from the list using the
mouse or type the
name in. The specified
material must be a
laminate material in
Patran. The data in this
material definition
defines the settings of
the MIDi, Ti, and
THETAi fields on the
PCOMP entry. This
property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic Defines mass not included in the mass derived
material within the element. There are three ways to from the material of the element. This is the NSM
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined
system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) in terms of mass per unit area of the element and
define a vector that will be projected onto the element, can be either a real value or a reference to an
or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default existing field definition. This property is optional.
element coordinate system. This property defines the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar
value can either be a constant value or a reference to
an existing coordinate system. This property is Defines the offset of the element‘s reference plane
optional. from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is
the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or
CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property
is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 157
Element Properties

Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation
158 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property.

Defines the material to be used. A list of all


Defines mass not included in the mass materials currently in the database is displayed
derived from the material of the when data is entered. Either select from the list
element. This is the NSM field on the using the mouse or type in the name. The specified
PCOMP entry. This property is defined material must be a laminate material in Patran. The
in mass per unit area, of the element. data in this material definition defines the settings of
This value can be either a real value or the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP
a reference to an existing field entry. This property is required.
definition. This property is optional.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three
ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or
MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or
a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
See Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 154 for a description of the SOL 400 Laminate
and Nonlinear Formulation options.

Note: TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8 entry defined in the
composite, or in other words, from the material of the first ply in the layup. The value of
GE is written to PCOMP as the sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the
percentage thickness of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry,
the 2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to have property
words used to define these values. If the values are not defined then the values are retrieved
from the MAT8 material card.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 159
Element Properties

Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4

Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL
property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the
requested behavior.
160 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior
of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered.
These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL
entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic


material within the element. There are three ways to
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate
system, which is then projected onto the element,
(2) define a vector that will be projected onto the
element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from
the default element coordinate system. This defines
Defines the uniform thickness for each the setting of the THETA field on the CTRIA3,
element. This property defines the CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar
setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on value can be either a constant value or a reference
the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or to an existing coordinate system. This property is
CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the optional.
PSHELL entry. This value can be either
a real value or a reference to an existing
field definition. This property is required.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8
Chapter 2: Building A Model 161
Element Properties

element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on
the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the
PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane
thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This
value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element.
This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined
by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real
value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1
Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be
written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the
usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on
the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static
Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.
162 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 163
Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling
behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is
entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the
PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties
are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be Defines the basic orientation for any non-
used for each element. This property isotropic material within the element. There
defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 are three ways to assign this definition: (1)
fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry reference a coordinate system which is then
and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. projected onto the element, (2) define a
This value can be either a real value or a vector that will be projected onto the
references to an existing field definition. element, or (3) define a constant angle offset
This property is required. from the default element coordinate system.
This property defines the setting of the
THETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR
entry. This scalar value can either be a
constant value or a reference to an existing
coordinate system. This property is optional.
164 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL
property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane
thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1
Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be
written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the
usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting
on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 165
Element Properties

P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6,
Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9,
P-Formulation Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,
Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,
the MSC. Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
166 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling
behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is
entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the
PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties
are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which


will be used for each element. This Defines the basic orientation for any non-
property defines the setting of the Ti, isotropic material within the element. There are
T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR3 two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference
or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis
the PSHELL entry. This value can be of the coordinate system is the material x-axis
either a real value or a references to an (2) define a constant angle offset from the
existing field definition. This property is projected x-axis of basic system.This property
required. is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that were not
shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
Chapter 2: Building A Model 167
Element Properties

properties.

Prop Name Description


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane
thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane
defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4
or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing
field definition. This property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit
the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders.
These are the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID
field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By
default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
168 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Prop Name Description


Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on
the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field
on the ADAPT entry.

Field Point Mesh (CQUAD4/TRIA3)(Exterior Acoustics)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shell Field Point Mesh Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CQUAD4 elements for creating acoustic field point
mesh for an exterior acoustics analysis. No property cards are created. The material referenced
should be the same as that defined for the 3D solid elements and exterior acoustic infinite elements used
to define the surrounding fluid environment of the structure, although no actual materials is written. In
order to recover results on these meshes, you must set the output request ACFPFRESULT.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 169
Element Properties

Each acoustic field point mesh defined is written to a seperate section of the bulk data using the BEGIN
AFPM=id.

Input Properties
170 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Bending Panel Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Tri/6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.
The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 171
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed
when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This
property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL
entry. This property is required.

Defines the uniform thickness for each


Defines the basic orientation for any element. This defines the T1, T2, T3,
non-isotropic material within the and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and
element. There are three ways to assign CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on
this definition: (1) reference a coordinate the PSHELL entry. This value can be
system which is then projected onto the either a real value or a reference to an
element, (2) define a vector that will be existing field definition. This property is
projected onto the element, or (3) define required.
a constant angle offset from the default
element coordinate system. This
property defines the setting of the
THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, Defines the mass not derived from
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. the material of the element. This
This scalar value can either be a property is defined in mass per unit
constant value or a reference to an area of the element and is the NSM
existing coordinate system. This field on the PSHELL entry. This value
property is optional. can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field
definition. This property is optional.
172 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4 or CQUAD8
element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on
the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.

Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Bending Panel Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 173
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database
is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or
type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3,
and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for


any non-isotropic material within
the element. There are three ways
to assign this definition: (1) Defines the uniform thickness, which will
reference a coordinate system, be used for each element. This defines
which is then projected onto the the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
element, (2) define a vector that CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the
will be projected onto the element, T field on the PSHELL entry. This value
or (3) define a constant angle can be either a real value or a reference
offset from the default element to an existing field definitions. This
coordinate system. This defines property is required.
the setting of the THETA or MCID
field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR Defines the mass not
entry. This scalar value can either Defines the distance from
the element’s reference included in the mass
be a constant value or a reference derived from the material
to an existing coordinate system. plane to the top and bottom
most extreme fibers, of the element. This is
This property is optional. defined in terms of mass
respectively. These
properties are the Z1 and Z2 per unit area of the
fields on the PSHELL entry. element. This is the NSM
These values can be either field on the PSHELL
real values or references to entry. This value can
existing field definitions. This either be real values or a
property is optional. reference to and existing
field definition. This
property is optional.
174 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Bending Panel P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8,
Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12,
Tri/13, Quad/16

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC . Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,
the MSC .Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 175
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the


database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using
the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the
MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is
required.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will


Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic be used for each element. This defines
material within the element. There are two ways to the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the
system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate T field on the PSHELL entry and this value
system is the material x-axis or (2) define a can be either a real value or a reference to
constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of an existing field definition. This property is
basic system.This property defines the setting of required.
the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or
CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL
property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
176 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

to view these properties.

Prop Name Description


Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the
Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
Maximum P-orders by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit
the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders.
These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID
field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By
default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the
EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 177
Element Properties

Standard Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Tri/3, Tri/6

Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an isoparametric and
axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.
178 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There
are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is
then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the
element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate
system. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This scalar
value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system.
This property is optional.

Defines the material to be used. A list of


all materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either
select from the list using the mouse or
type in the name. This defines the setting
of the MID field on the CTRIAX6 entry.
This property is required.

PLPLANE Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX, CQUADX)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Hyperelastic Tri/3, Tri/6, QUAD/4,
QUAD/8
PLPLANE

Use this form to create axisymmetric solid elements. This defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric
cross section ring element with or without midside nodes.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 179
Element Properties

Location of stress and strain output. the


options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.”
this defines the STR field on the
PLPLANE entry.
For SOL600 solutions use the PLPLANE option and any
material type. For non-SOL600 runs, use the
Hypereleastic option with Mooney-Rivlin materials.

2D Axi-Symmetric Laminated Solid Composite


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate CQUADX

Use this form to create CQUADX elements and a PLCOMP property.


The DIRECT field of these cards is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual
thicknesses and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as
percentages of the total ply stack thickness.
180 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material
of all materials currently in the within the element. There are three ways to assign this
database is displayed when data is definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then
entered. Either select from the list projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be
using the mouse or type in the name. projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
This property defines the PLCOMP offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar
entry to be used. This property is value can either be a constant value or a reference to an
required. existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

Defines element edge


used as base ply
orientation.

Not used for


axisymmetric elements
Chapter 2: Building A Model 181
Element Properties

Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4

Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.
The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.
182 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the
name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2
field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is
required.

The presence of nonstructural mass in the model


The orientation of the material directions
does not change the stiffness of the model.
can be specified by the Material
Orientation parameter value CID, Real
Scalar, or Vector.

Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields
on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 183
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property
defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will
be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.
184 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,
Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,
P- Formulation Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields
on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-
formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC. Nastran
Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 185
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property
defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. The MID2
field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic


material within the element. There are two ways Polynomial orders for displacement
to assign this definition: (1) reference a representation within elements. Each
coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of contains a list of three integers referring to
the coordinate system is the material x-axis the directions defined by the P-order
(2) define a constant angle offset from the Coordinate System (default elemental).
projected x-axis of basic system. This defines the Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is the polynomial orders to the values specified
optional. in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi
fields on the PVAL entry.
186 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Prop Name Description


P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.
By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the
EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Infinite (Exterior Acoustic Element)(CACINF3/CACINF4)


These elements are used in exterior acoustic analysis (frequency response) and placed on the outside of
the solid mesh representing the fluid (coincident with the outside surface). The must share the same nodes
as the solid mesh. They simulate the fluid proprties reaching to infinity beyond the boundary of the solid
mesh representing the fluid. The surfaces that these elements connect to must be convex. However it is
not necessary that the surface be smooth. They also take on the same fluid proprties as the solid fluid
mesh.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Infinite Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CACINF3, CACINF4 elements and a PACINF property. The appropriate fields
on the PACINF entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 187
Element Properties

Interger value that defines the radial


interpolation order, which must be
defined and greater than zero. Defines the material to be used. This
material is generally the same material used
to define the solid fluid mesh in an exterior
acoustics analysis (MAT10). The same
The pole of the acoustic infinite material should also be referenced when
elements. This must be coorinate using acoustic field point meshes.
location defined in the global Patran
coordinate system. A node ID can also
be selected graphically.

2D Plane Strain Laminated Solid Composite


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate QUAD/4, QUAD/8

Use this form to create quadratic elements and a PLCOMP property.


The DIRECT field of these cards is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual
thicknesses and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as
percentages of the total ply stack thickness.
188 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic


material within the element. There are three ways
to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate
system, which is then projected onto the element,
Defines the material to be used. A list of all (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the
materials currently in the database is element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from
displayed when data is entered. Either select the default element coordinate system. This scalar
from the list using the mouse or type in the value can either be a constant value or a reference
name. This property defines the PLCOMP to an existing coordinate system. This property is
entry to be used. This property is required. optional.
Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

Defines element edge


used as base ply
orientation.

Not used for


axisymmetric elements

Standard Membrane (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 189
Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Membrane Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Tri /6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.
The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.
190 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed
when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This
property defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the Defines the uniform thickness that will
material of the element. This property be used for each element. This value
is defined in mass per unit area of the can either be a real value or reference
element and is the NSM field on the an existing field definition. This property
PSHELL entry. This value can be either defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on
a real value or a reference to an the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or
existing field definition. This property is CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the
optional. PSHELL entry. This property is
required.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There
are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, which is then
projected onto the element. (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element,
or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This
property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a
reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Revised Membrane (CQUADR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 191
Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Membrane Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields
on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
192 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be


Defines the mass not derived from the used. A list of all materials
material of the element. This property is currently in the database is
defined in terms of mass per unit area of displayed when data is
the element and is the NSM field on the entered. Either select from the
PSHELL entry. This value can be either a list using the mouse or type in
real value or a reference to an existing the name. This defines the
field definition. This property is optional. settings of the MID1 field on
the PSHELL entry. This
Defines the uniform thickness that will be property is required.
used for each element. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property
defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on
the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the
T field on the PSHELL entry. This
property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are
three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then
projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3)
define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can
either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is
optional.

P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
Chapter 2: Building A Model 193
Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Membrane P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,
Quad/9. Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,
Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields
on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-
formulation shell element is supported in MSC. Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC .Nastran
Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
194 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed
when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This
property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any Polynomial orders for displacement
non-isotropic material within the representation within elements. Each
element. There are two ways to assign contains a list of three integers referring to
this definition: (1) reference a the directions defined by the P-order
coordinate system, then the projected Coordinate System (default elemental).
x-axis of the coordinate system is the Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive
material x-axis or (2) define a constant cycle. The adaptive analysis process will
angle offset from the projected x-axis of limit the polynomial orders to the values
basic system. This property defines the specified in Maximum P-orders. These are
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This
property is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 195
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Prop Name Description


P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.
By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is
the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Shear Panel (CSHEAR)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D Shear Panel Quad/4

Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a shear panel element
of the structural model.
196 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the


database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using
the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID field on
the PSHEAR entry. This property is required.

Defines the effectiveness Defines mass not


Defines the uniform thickness, which factor for extensional included in the
will be used for each element. This stiffness along the 1-2 and mass derived from
defines the T field on the PSHEAR 3-4 sides. This is the F1 the material of the
entry. This property is required. This field on the PSHEAR entry. element. This is
value can be either a real value or a This value can be either a defined in mass per
reference to an existing field definition. real value or a reference to unit area of the
an existing field definition. element. This is the
This property is optional. NSM field on the
PSHEAR entry.
Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional This value can be
stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4 sides. This is the either a real value
F2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be or a reference to an
either a real value or a reference to an existing existing field
field definition. This property is optional. definition. This
property is
optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 197
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based
on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or
if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the
PSHEARN entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces
the PSHEARN entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces
it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or
detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based
on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining
a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear
Solution Type, 366.

Solid (CHEXA)
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Topologies


Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Standard Tet/4, Wedge/6

Laminate (HEX/8 Formulation Hex/8, Tet/10


only)
P-Formulation Wedge/15,
Hex/20
Hyperelastic
Formulation

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property or a CHEXA
and a PCOMP property. For Property 3D Solid / Laminate you can now define the Integration Scheme.
Note that only Assumed Strain is allowed for HEX8 elements only when ply stack direction is in Z-
198 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

element diretion and the ply thicknesses have been defined as percent thicknesses. Any other
combination will revert the integration scheme to the Nastran default for linear or quadratic elements.

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in


the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from
the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines
the settings of the MID field on the PSOLID entryor references a
PCOMP entry in the case of Laminated Composites. This
property is required.

Defines both the orientation of


referenced nonisotropic Defines the type of
materials and solid element integration network to be
results. This can be set to used. This property is the IN
Global, Elemental, or to a field on the PSOLID entry
specific coordinate frame and can be set to Bubble,
reference and defines the Two, or Three. This property
CORDM field on the PSOLID is optional.
entry. The default is Global.
Nonlinear stresses and strains
are output in the Elemental
system regardless of the
setting. Defines the integration scheme to be used.
This property is the ISOP field on the
PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or
Defines where the output for these elements Full. This property is optional.
are to be reported. This property can be set
to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS
field on the PSOLID entry. This property is
optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 199
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be
written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the
usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on
the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an
adaptive, p-element analysis:

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 3D Solid P-Formulation Tet/4, Wedge/6

Hex/8, Tet/10

Wedge/15, Hex/20, Tet/16,


Tet/40, Wedge/24,Wedge/52,
Hex/32, Hex/64

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.
200 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Polynomial orders for displacement Defines the material to be


representation within elements. Each used. A list of all materials
contains a list of three integers currently in the database is
Defines orientation for referring to the directions defined by displayed when data is
the referenced the P-order Coord. System (default entered. Either select from
material. This elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the list using the mouse or
property can be set to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive type in the name. This
Global, Elemental or analysis process will limit the property defines the setting
to a user-defined polynomial orders to the values of the MID field on the
coordinate system specified in Maximum P-orders. PSOLID entry. This
and defines the These are the Polyi fields on the property is required.
CORDM field on the PVAL entry.
PSOLID entry. The
default is Global. This
property is optional.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 201
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Prop Name Description


P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.
By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the
EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Integration Network Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the
IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three.
This property is optional.
Integration Scheme Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This
can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field
on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.

Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear
analysis:

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6,
Quad/8, Quad/9
Hyperelastic
Formulation
202 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a PLPLANE
property.

Defines the material to be used. A


Identification number list of all materials currently in the
of a coordinate database is displayed when data is
Location of stress and strain
system defining the entered. Either select from the list
output. the options are “GAUS”
plane of deformation. using the mouse or type in the
(default) or “GRID.” this defines
This defines the CID name. This property defines the
the STR field on the PLPLANE
field on the PLPLANE setting of the MID field on the
entry.
entry. PLPLANE entry. This property is
required.

Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear
analysis:

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric CQUADX,

Hyperelastic CTRIAX
Formulation
Chapter 2: Building A Model 203
Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property.

Defines the material to be used. A list of all


materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either select Location of stress and strain output. the
from the list using the mouse or type in the options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.” this
name. This property defines the setting of defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.
the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This
property is required.
204 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear
analysis:

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 3D Solid Hyperelastic HEX, PENT, TET
Formulation

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID property.

Defines the material to be used. A list of all


materials currently in the database is displayed Location of stress and strain output.
when data is entered. Either select from the list the options are “GAUS” (default) or
using the mouse or type in the name. This “GRID.” this defines the STR field
property defines the setting of the MID field on on the PLSOLID entry.
the PLSOLID entry. This property is required.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 205
Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the form above:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be
written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the
usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting
on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

3D Laminate Solid (CHEXA)


This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties
form and the following options are chosen.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies


Create 3D Solid Laminate HEX, PENT, TET

Use this form to create CHEXA elements and a PCOMP (SOL 600) or PCOMPLS (SOL400) property.
For Property 3D Solid / Laminate you can now define the Integration Scheme. Note that only Assumed
Strain is allowed for HEX8 elements only when ply stack direction is in Z-element diretion and the ply
thicknesses have been defined as percent thicknesses. Any other combination will revert the integration
scheme to the Nastran default for linear or quadratic elements.
206 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Element Properties

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic


material within the element. There are three ways to
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate
Defines the material to be used. A list of all system, which is then projected onto the element, (2)
materials currently in the database is define a vector that will be projected onto the element,
displayed when data is entered. Either or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default
select from the list using the mouse or type element coordinate system. This scalar value can
in the name. This property defines the either be a constant value or a reference to an existing
PCOMP entry to be used. This property is coordinate system. This property is optional.
required.
Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

Defines available laminate options “MEM”,


Defines element face used as base ply orientation. For “BEND”, “SMEAR”, “SMCORE” (see MD
[Thickness Direction 3D] Nastran QRG for definitions.
"Nastran Elem X" -- this corresponds to 1-4-8-5
"Nastran Elem Y" -- this corresponds to 2-1-5-6
"Nastran Elem Z" -- this corresponds to 1-2-3-4
Chapter 2: Building A Model 207
Beam Modeling

2.8 Beam Modeling


Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or solid
structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be
complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define the orientation
of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite
element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly defined. Fortunately, Patran
provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of modeling.

Cross Section Definition


The cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages General Section
Beam (CBAR), 93 and Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 110. The properties can be entered directly into the data
boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms
to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library forms are a much more convenient way of defining
properties for standard cross sections and are shown below.

Create Action
The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the particular cross section desired
(e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam section must be entered.
208 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Beam Modeling

Current
beam
section as
selected
from the
section
library icon
palette. The
required
dimensions
are shown.

Enter the
dimensions
of the beam
section
here,
referring to
the beam
section
icon.

Writes the current beam


properties to a report file.

Calculates the beam properties


based on the current dimensions These forward and backward
and displays an image of the scaled arrows provide access to
section along with the properties. additional beam section icons.

Beam section library icon palette.


Select the icon representing the
desired section.

Beam section name to be created.

List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the section names
of interest using the filter mechanism.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 209
Beam Modeling

Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options available with
the beam library are documented in the Patran Reference Manual, see Beam Library (p. 483) in the Patran
Reference Manual. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the
section data box on the element properties form.

Supplied Functions

I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness
(t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web
thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition.

Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange
thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R).

Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width
(W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).

Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).

Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top
and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).
210 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Beam Modeling

Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).

Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overall


width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange
thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4).

Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat
flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).

H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of vertical
flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical flange
(W1/2).

Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), horizontal
flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).

Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between as
measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one side (W),
thickness (t1).

Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the common
edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal angle).

Cross Section Orientation


The Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the beam
cross section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells MSC Nastran that the
cross section y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beam’s x-axis (the line connecting the two node
points) and this vector. The Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. In this case the y-axis
lies in the plane defined by the x-axis and the selected node.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 211
Beam Modeling

When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the following select box
appears on the screen.
These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in
more detail in the Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual.

These tools
provide different
ways to define
vectors. In
addition, the user
These three tools define the orientation vector is requested to
as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a selected select a coordinate
coordinate system. This is a convenient way system in which
to specify the orientation when it is aligned this vector is
with one of the three axes of a rectangular defined.
coordinate system. When the system is not The simplest list
rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may processor syntax
not provide the desired definition because the that appears in the
defined vector does not change direction at databox for a
different points in space--these tools just vector in an
provide an alternate way to define a global alternate
vector. coordinate system
is <x_component,
y_component,
z_component>
coord cord_id (e.g.
<1, 0, 0> coord 3).
In many cases it is
easy to simply type
a definition in this
form into the Bar
This tool may be used to define a general vector Orientation
with respect to an alternate coordinate system. databox.
When this icon is picked, the select menu changes
to the one on the right.

After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in Patran. The first
option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, the Definition of X Y
Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orientation will be shown on
the model. A second option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross
section. There is an option on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 393) in the
Patran Reference Manual called Beam Display. The menu allows different display options for displaying
an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and orientation.
Users should be aware of one difference between the Patran and MD Nastran definitions for cross section
orientation. In Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the
beam nodes. In MD Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in the same system as the
analysis system at the first node of the beam. In Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation
in a different coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated,
the necessary transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.
212 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Beam Modeling

Cross Section End Offsets


Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an
offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node 2 to the cross
section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors.
One difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, however, is that for the offset
the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very
convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>)
into the appropriate data box.
Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar to those
for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as
vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot shows only the direction
of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful to view the Beam Display
menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 393) in the Patran Reference
Manual to select the display option with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both
the offset and non-offset positions.

Stiffened Cylinder Example


Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross section
was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input Properties form. The Z
cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimensions input, a section name
input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to
ON. The defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord
1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction
of the global, cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1
Chapter 2: Building A Model 213
Beam Modeling

typed into the Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially
inward.

R
Z1

X
Z

Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder


214 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

2.9 Loads and Boundary Conditions


The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on the Patran
main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are several option menus. The
selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which load and boundary
conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MD Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be
created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and details of all
the loads and boundary conditions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Analysts Preference.

Loads & Boundary Conditions Form


This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary Conditions
form is used to provide options to create the various MD Nastran loads and boundary conditions. For a
definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 23) in the Patran Reference
Manual. Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary
Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions, 237.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 215
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are Displacement, Force,
Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load, Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Velocity,
Acceleration, Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact, Initial
Temperature, Planar Rigid Wall and Init.Rotation Field.

Defines what type of region is to be loaded.


The available options depend on the selected
Object. The general selections can be Nodal,
Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal
is applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform
defines a constant value to be applied over an
entire element, element face, or element edge.
Element Variable defines a value that varies
across an entire element, element face, or
element edge.

Current Load Case type is set on the Load


Case menu. When the Load Cases toggle
located on the main menu is chosen, the
Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load
Case Type, select either Static or Time
Dependent, then enter the name of the
case, and click on the Apply button.

Generates either a Static, 216 or Time


Dependent, 219 Input Data form, depending on
the current Load Case Type.
216 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.

Object Type
• Displacement • Nodal
• Element Uniform
• Element Variable
• Force • Nodal
• Pressure • Element Uniform
• Element Variable
• Temperature • Nodal
• Element Uniform
• Element Variable
• Inertial Load • Element Uniform
• Initial Displacement • Nodal
• Initial Velocity • Nodal
• Velocity • Nodal
• Acceleration • Nodal
• Distributed Load • Element Uniform
• Element Variable
• CID Distributed Load • Element Uniform
• Element Variable
• Total Load • Element Uniform
• Contact • Element Uniform
• Initial Plastic Strain • Element Uniform
• Initial Stress • Element Uniform
• Initial Temperature • Nodal
• Planar Rigid Wall * • Nodal
• Init. Rotation Field * • Nodal

* For SOL 700 only.

Static
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary
Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load
Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 214. The information on the
Chapter 2: Building A Model 217
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information
found on this form.
218 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Defines a general scaling factor for all


values defined on this form. The
default value is 1.0. Primarily used
when field definitions are used to
define the load values.

Input Data in this section will vary.


See Object Tables, 221 for detailed
information.

When specifying real values in the


Input Data entries, spatial fields can
be referenced. All defined spatial fields
currently in the database are listed. If
the input focus is placed in the Input
Data entry and a spatial field is
selected by clicking in this list, a
reference to that field will be entered in
the Input Data entry.

This button will display a Discrete FEM


Fields input form to allow field creation
and modification within the loads/bcs
application. Visible only when focus is set
in a databox which can have a DFEM
field reference.

Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-of-freedom


data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal
type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame
definition.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 219
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Time Dependent
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary
Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load Case Type is set
on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 214 and Load
Cases, 236. The information on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined
below is the standard information found on this form.
220 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Defines a general scaling


factor for all values defined
Load/BC Set Scale Factor on this form.The default
value is 1.0. Primarily used
1 when field definitions are
used to define the load
Spatial Dependence * Time Dependence values.

Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3)

Input Data in this section


Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) will vary. See Object
Tables, 221 for detailed
information.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3)

When specifying time


dependent values in the
Input Data entries, time-
dependent fields can be
Spatial Fields Time Dependent Fields referenced. All defined time-
dependent fields currently in
the database are listed. If the
input focus is placed in the
Input Data entry and a time-
dependent field is selected
by clicking in this list, a
reference to that field will be
FEM Dependent Data... entered in the Input Data
entry.

Analysis Coordinate Frame


Coord 0
Defines the coordinate frame
to be used to interpret the
degree-of-freedom data
OK Reset defined on this form. This only
appears on the form for Nodal
type loads. This can be a
reference to any existing
This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation coordinate frame definition.
and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set
in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.

When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All
defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input
Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be
entered in the Input Data entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 221
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Object Tables
These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The
data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases, the data fields also
depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various
input data that pertains to a specific selected object:

Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration


Object Type Analysis Type Option
Displacement Nodal Structural Standard
Velocity
Acceleration

Creates MD Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data for Displacement entries. All non blank entries will
cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created
to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation. Phase angle specifications will create DPHASE
entries for all corresponding non blank translational or rotational data in frequency response analysis.
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration LBCs used in frequency response / dynamic analysis also
define the RLOAD1 entries with DISP, VELOC, and ACCEL keywords, respectively. For frequency
response analysis, the LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial
frequency field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as
Time/Frequency dependent to do this. Values given via this option are total enforced values. For relative
enforced values used in SOL 400, see the description for the Relative Displacement option below.

Input Data Description


Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the total enforced translational values. These are in model
length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the total enforced rotational values. These are in radians.
Translational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency
(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) response analysis for the translational values. These are in degrees.
Rotational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency
(Rth1,Rth2,Rth3) response analysis for the rotational values. These are in degrees.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Displacement Element Uniform Structural 3D

Element Variable

Applies a zero or nonzero total displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The
primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be used for
standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are
created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD entries are created. In
222 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

frequency response analysis, the phase angles are written as DPHASE entries. See comments above for
nodal displacements.

Input Data Description


Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values
are in model-length units.
Translation Phases Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) analysis for the translational displacement values. These are in degrees.

Object Type Analysis Type Option


Displacement Nodal Structural Relative Displacement

Applies a zero or nonzero relative displacement boundary condition as opposed to a total magnitude. This
is used in SOL 400 only with multiple steps and not applicable to other solution sequences. This LBC
will be ignored if present in a referenced load case for solution sequences other than SOL 400. The
appropriate SPC1 and SPCR entries are created. For example, if a DOF is specified on a SPCR with 0.0
for step 2, the relative displacement of this DOF for step 2 with respective to step 1 is 0.0. The total
displacement of step 2 is 0.2 if the solution of step 1 for this DOF is 0.2.

Input Data Description


Relative Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the relative enforced translational displacement values
in vector form, each value separated by a comma between the
brackets <>. If no enforced translation is to be specified, the
particular component should be left blank.
Relative Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defined the relative enforced rotational displacement values in
vector form, each value separated by a comma between the
brackets <>. If no enforced rotation is to be specified, the
particular component should be left blank.

Force
Object Type Analysis Type
Force Nodal Structural

Creates MD Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries. Creates the DPHASE entries in
frequency response analysis when specifying phase angles for out-of-phase loading. RLOAD1 entries are
created for dynamic analysis and reference the appropriate FORCE entries. For frequency response
analysis, the force LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency
field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency
dependent to do this.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 223
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Description


Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.
Force Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency
(Fth1,Fth2,Fth3) response analysis for the corresponding force components. These are
in degrees.
Moment Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency
(Mth1,Mth2,Mth3) response analysis for the corresponding moment components. These
are in degrees.

Pressure
Object Type Analysis Type Dimension
Pressure Element Uniform Structural 2D

Creates MD Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values.
These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform
pressure field across that face.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a
PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These
values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure
field across that face.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through
P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined
as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit
length (i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal
loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
at the middle of the application region.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Pressure Element Uniform Structural 3D

Creates MD Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.


224 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Description


Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it
will be evaluated once at the center of the applied region.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Pressure Element Variable Structural 2D

Creates MD Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If
a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1
through P4 values.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a
PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar
field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4
values.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through
P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined
as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit
length (e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent
nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated independently at each node.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Pressure Element Variable Structural 3D

Creates MD Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.


Chapter 2: Building A Model 225
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Description


Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced,
it will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.

Temperature
Object Type Analysis Type
Temperature Nodal Structural

Creates MD Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D

Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are written to the
TEMPP1 entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that have Z1/Z2
defined, T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran determines the
correct TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left blank.
TBAR/TPRIME are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is for
Element Variable Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written or
necessary. All others fields are left blank.
Creates MD Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The
temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b,
T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.
226 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Temperature Element Uniform Structural 2D

Creates MD Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The
temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness
is defined to be 0.0.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Temperature Element Variable Structural 1D

Creates MD Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field
reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA
and TB fields.
Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will
be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields.
Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will
be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Temperature Element Variable Structural 2D

Creates MD Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.


Chapter 2: Building A Model 227
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Description


Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top
and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values
on the TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The
top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient
values on the TEMPP1 entry.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D, 2D, 3D
Element Variable

This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for
the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case when a spatial
field is referenced. Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are
written to the TEMPP1 entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that
have Z1/Z2 defined, T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran
determines the correct TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left
blank. TBAR/TPRIME are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is
for Element Variable Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written
or necessary. All others fields are left blank.

Input Data Description


Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.

Inertial Load
Object Type Analysis Type
Inertial Load Element Uniform Structural

Creates MD Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.
Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RFORCE
entry.

The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The
origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity
and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and
228 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each Patran
load set.

Initial Displacement
Object Type Analysis Type
Initial Displacement Nodal Structural

Creates a set of MD Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC
entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Initial Velocity
Object Type Analysis Type
Initial Velocity Nodal Structural

Creates a set of MD Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Input Data Description


Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC
entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Distributed Load
Object Type Analysis Type Dimension
Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 1D
Element Variable

Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MD Nastran PLOAD1 entries.
The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation
element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the
Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually if necessary.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load
variation.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 229
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data Description


Edge Distributed Load Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
(f1,f2,f3)
Edge Distributed Moment Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
(m1,m2,m3)

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension


Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 2D
Element Variable

Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate system for
the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along the edge. Positive
x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See Patran Element Library (p. 345) in the
Reference Manual - Part III. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2,
3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z
direction is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y
direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always
points into the element. The MD Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the edge.

Input Data Description


Edge Distributed Load For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and
(f1,f2,f3) THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D
elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and
converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).
Edge Distributed Moment For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per
(m1,m2,m3) unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT
entries).

Contact
Object Type Analysis Type
Contact Element Uniform Structural

This form is used to define certain data for the MD Nastran Input entries. Other data entries are defined
under the Analysis Application when setting up a job for nonlinear static or nonlinear transient dynamic
analysis. A contact table is also supported; by default, all contact bodies initially have the potential to
interact with all other contact bodies and themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the
Contact Table form, located on the Solution Parameters subform in the Analysis Application when
creating a Load Step.
230 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Preview Rigid Body Motion


After defining the Input Properties you can use the Preview Rigid Body Motion to check the movement
of the rigid bodies in place. This is an effective tool for verifying the directions for LBCs.

Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600)


Input Description
Penetration Type If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not
allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Symmetric, in
addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments
of the Slave Region.
Static Friction Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces.
Coefficient (MU1)
Stiffness in Stick FSTIF is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value
(FSTIF) is usually adequate.
Penalty Stiffness SFAC is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value
Scaling Factor (SFAC) is usually adequate.
Slideline Width (W1) Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the
area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry.
Vector Pointing from A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the
Master to Slave Surface Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the
coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each
region.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 231
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 )


.

Description
Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two
Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used.
Define (type of contact) Select 1) Analytic Contact, 2) Contact Area, 3) Exclusion Region, or 4) Glue
Deactivation. The Contact Area and Exclusion Region are defined using MD
Nastran entry BCHANGE in the .bdf file, with NODE for Contact Area, and
EXCLUDE for Exclusion Region. The Glue Deactivation is defined using
MD Nastran entry UNGLUE.
Boundary Type Select either 1) Analytic, or 2) Discrete. By default, a deformable contact
body boundary is defined by the free faces of its elements; this is used by the
Discrete option. However, instead of using the free faces of the elements
(Discrete), it is possible to use spline surfaces (2D) to represent the outer
faces (element faces) of the contact bodies; this is used by the Analytic
option. The Analytic option can improve the accuracy of deformable-
deformable contact analysis.
C0 Continuity Using this, enforces C0-continuity at edges where the normal vector to the
outer contour of the structure indicates a discontinuity. This is enabled for 3D
analysis only.
Auto Detect Select this to cause the automatic detection of any discontinuity.
Discontinuities
Feature Angle If the angle between the normals of two touching (adjacent) segments of
contact bodies is greater than the Feature Angle, there is a discontinuity there,
and the discontinuity (at edge) is preserved.
MFD Increment The MFD file contains the spline surfaces that were created to represent some
or all of the outer faces of the contact model. Using this causes the spline
surfaces to be written to an MFD file every nth increment. This file is an
Patran database, and can be opened with Patran, and the spline surfaces can
be compared with the contact model.
Select See Select Deactivation Region, 232
Discontinuities...
Edge Contact... See Edge Contact Subform, 232
Select Contact Area... See Select Contact Area, 232
Select Exclusion See Select Exclusion Region, 232
Region...
Select Deactivation See Select Deactivation Region, 232
Region...

Select Discontinuities Subform


232 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define any discontinuities.
Detect Discontinuities Click on this button to determine if there are any discontinuities for the
entities that define the Application Region.
Define Discontinuities Select entities to define the discontinuities.

Edge Contact Subform


.

Description
Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CHEXA elements)
Element) use this to include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to
the BCBODY entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D)
of the MD Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is
COPTB (flag that indicates how body surfaces may contact).
Check Layers (Shell For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses
Element) the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only,
Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the
appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore
Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the
2nd data block.
Include Edges (Edges) Use this to specify how body surfaces may contact. There are three options,
Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCBODY
entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the MD
Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB (flag
that indicates how body surfaces may contact).

Select Contact Area


.

Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the contact area.
Define Contact Area Select entities to define the contact area.

Select Exclusion Region


.

Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the exclusion region.
Define Exclusion Select entities to define the exclusion region.
Region

Select Deactivation Region


Chapter 2: Building A Model 233
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the glue deactivation
region.
Define Deactivated Select entities to define the entities that are to be un-glued.
Entities

Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only)


The input data form differs for 1D and 2D rigid bodies. One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as
beam elements, or as curves (which may optionally be meshed with beam elements prior to translation)
and used in 2D problems. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements,
or as surfaces (which may optionally be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation) and
are used in 3D problems. The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if meshed or as NURB
surfaces if not meshed.
234 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Description
Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, MSC.Patran displays normal vectors or tic
marks. These should point inward to the rigid body. In other words, the side
opposite the side with the vectors is the side of contact. Generally, the vector
points away from the body in which it wants to contact. If it does not point
inward, then use the modify option to turn this toggle ON. The direction of the
inward normal will be reversed.
Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It is OFF by
default.
Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of Motion Control.
If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular velocity/rotation are set to
zero in the CONTACT option regardless of their settings here (for increment
zero).
Motion Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of different ways:
Control velocity, position (displacement), or forces/moments.
Velocity For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y velocity components
(vector) for 2D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3D problems.
Angular For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give its angular
Velocity (rad/time) velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the center of rotation
(global Z axis for 2D problems) or axis of rotation (for 3D problems).
Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two
Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients the average value is used.
Rotation This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigid body. If
Reference Point left blank the rotation reference point will default to the origin.
Axis of For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3D problem, aside from the rotation reference point,
Rotation if you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the form of a
vector.
First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the
force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the force, but
the application node must also be specified here. If both force and moment are
specified, they must use different control nodes even if they are coincident. If
only 1 control node is specified the rigid body will not be allowed to rotate.
Second Control This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the moment
Node is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but the application
node must also be specified here. It also acts as the rotation reference point. If
both force and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes
even if they are coincident.

Planar Rigid Wall (SOL 700 only)


Chapter 2: Building A Model 235
Loads and Boundary Conditions

Object Type Analysis Type


Planar Rigid Wall Nodal Explicit Nonlinear

Two different planar rigid wall options exist:


1. Kinematic rigid wall without friction
2. Penalty method based rigid wall with friction
These are seen as options at the top of the Input Data form. The user must select which wall will be used.
Both wall’s position and orientation are defined by selecting a coordinate system which has its origin on
the plane and the local z axis as the outward normal from the contact surface. This defines a WALL Bulk
Data entry. There are only parameters associated with the penalty based planar rigid wall.

Input Data Description


Static Friction Coefficient Static coefficient of friction.
Kinetic Friction Coefficient Kinetic coefficient of friction.
Exponential Decay Coefficient Exponential decay coefficient EXP.

Initial Rotation Field (SOL 700 only)


Object Type Analysis Type
Init. Rotation Field Nodal Explicit Nonlinear

Defines a velocity field of grid points consisting of a rotation and a traslation specification.
Creates a TIC3 Bulk Data entry.

Input Data Description


Trans Veloc(v1,v2,v3) Defines the initial translational velocity values. These are in model
length units per unit time.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the initial rotational velocity values. These are in degrees per
unit time.
Rotation Center Defines a point at the center of rotation.
236 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Load Cases

2.10 Load Cases


Load cases in Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for the model. Load
cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MD Nastran is similar. The individual
load sets are translated into MD Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE
commands in the Case Control Section.
For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases Application
(Ch. 5) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 237
Defining Contact Regions

2.11 Defining Contact Regions


The MD Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC.Nastran
Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D structural regions or
rigid bodies.
This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in Patran. After selecting the
Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may come into contact.
Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form
238 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Defining Contact Regions

Application Region
One or more curves, surface edges, or solid
Geometry Filter edges are defined for the Master and Slave
application regions. The application region
u Geometry can only contain geometric entities. To
model contact between FEM entities without
associated geometry, curves must first be
created from the nodes using the tools
available in the Geometry application.
Master Surface: Slide Line

Slave Surface: Slide Line

Toggles the select box between


Active Region: Master Master and Slave regions. The Master
and Slave application regions can be
defined in either order.

Select Curves
Select the curve or edge.

Add Remove
Adds the entities in the Select
Master Region Curves databox to either the Master
Region or Slave Region depending
on the setting of the Active Region
option menu.

Slave Region

OK Clear
Chapter 2: Building A Model 239
Defining Contact Regions

Contact
The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by pushing the
Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordinate form.
If the Penetration Type is
One Sided, nodes in the
Input Data Slave Region are not
allowed to penetrate the
Penetration Type: One Sided segments of the Master
Region. If Two Sided, in
addition, nodes in the
Friction Coefficient (MU1) Master Region are not
allowed to penetrate
segments of the Slave
Region. This is the PTYPE
field on the BCONP entry.
Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF)
Coefficient of static friction
between the two surfaces.
This is the MU1 field on
Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC) the BFRIC entry.
FSTIF on the BFRIC entry
1.0 and SFAC on the BCONP
entry are penalty
parameters in the contact
Slideline Width (W1) formulation. The default
values are usually
adequate.

Slideline Width is constant


along the slideline and is
used to determine the area
for contact stress
calculation. This is the Wi
field on the BFRIC entry.
A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface
A vector must be defined
which lies in the contact
plane and points from
the Master region to the
Slave region. This vector
is used to define the
OK Reset coordinate system on
the BCONP entry and
the BLSEG entries for
each region.
240 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Rotor Dynamics

2.12 Rotor Dynamics


The MD Nastran Preference supports steady state and transient rotor dynamics, introduced in
MSC.Nastran 2004. This capability allows you to model structures with rotating parts, allowing for
gyroscopic effects to be included.
Rotor Dynamics are modelled using Rotor and Unbalance entities, created within the Rotor Dynamics...
selection under the Tools menu:
Chapter 2: Building A Model 241
Rotor Dynamics

Rotor Dynamics Form


The Rotor Dynamics form is accessed from the Rotor Dynamics... selection under the Tools menu. This
form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Rotors, which define spin properties, including the axis of
rotation, spin direction, damping factor, and speed.

Create
Modify
Delete
Show

Steady State
Transient

Rotor
Unbalance (Transient only)

A set of co-linear nodes that make up the rotor


model (spin axis). These are the grids in the MD
Nastran ROTORG Bulk Data entry.

Two nodes defining the spin direction.


These are the GRIDA and GRIDB fields in
the MD Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk
Data entries. These nodes must be
included in the “Rotor Node List” above.

Rotor structural damping factor (default 0.0).


This is the GR field of the MD Nastran
RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries.

Spin Profile (Steady State)


Spin History (Transient)
242 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Rotor Dynamics

Spin Profile Form


For Steady State analyses, the Spin Profile form is used to define the relative spin rates.

The unit for the speed entries. RPM for


revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for
frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT
field of the MD Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data
entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’ or
‘FREQ’.
List of relative spin rates. Entries must be in
ascending or descending order. At least one
entry required (no default). These values make
up the SPEEDi fields of the MD Nastran
RSPINR Bulk Data entry.

Spin History Form


For Transient analyses, the Spin History form is used to define the spin rates.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 243
Rotor Dynamics

The unit for the speed entries. RPM for


revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for
frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT
field of the MD Nastran RSPINT Bulk Data
entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’ or
‘FREQ’.

A constant multiplier to be applied to the Time


Dependent Field.

A time dependent field that defines the spin


rate as a function of time. This field, with the
Speed Amplitude applied to it, will be
translated into an MD Nastran TABLED1 Bulk
Data entry that is referenced by the RSPINT
entry.

Unbalance Form
The Rotor Dynamics Unbalance form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Unbalances, which define
unbalance loads for transient analyses in terms of cylindrical system with the rotor axis as the Z axis.
244 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Rotor Dynamics

Create
Modify
Delete
Show

The unbalance is applied to a node, which must


be included in a transient rotor. When a transient
rotor is selected, the “Node” listbox is populated
with nodes from that rotor’s axis. The unbalance
node may then be selected from that list,
assuring that it belongs to an existing transient
rotor.
This node defines the GRID field of the MD
Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Displays the Unbalance Properties form to


define the remaining parameters for the MD
Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 245
Rotor Dynamics

Unbalance Properties Form


The Unbalance Properties Form is used to define the remaining parameters for the Unbalance.
246 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Rotor Dynamics

Define the MASS, ROFFSET, and ZOFFSET


fields of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data
entry.
For each of these values, either a constant real
value may be specified, or a time dependent field
my be selected from the list below. Time
dependent fields are translated to TABLED1
entries, and referenced by integer ID values in
the appropriate UNBALNC fields.
Defaults are 1.0 for Radial Offset and 0.0 for Z
Offset. There is no default for Mass.

Angular position, in degrees, of the mass in


the unbalance coordinate system (default 0.0).
This defines the THETA field of the MD
Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

The start and termination times for applying the


unbalance load. The default start time is 0.0,
while the default termination time is 999999.0.
These values define the Ton and Toff fields of
the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Correction flag to specify whether 1) the mass


will be used to modify the total mass in the
transient response calculations, 2) the effect of
the rotor spin rate change will be included in
the transient response calculation, or 3) both.
Possible values are None, Mass, Speed, or
Both (default None).
This value defines the CFLAG field of the MD
Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Defines the coordinate system orientation


relative to the ACID of the unbalance node (no
default).
This vector defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields of
the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.
Chapter 2: Building A Model 247
Rotor Dynamics
248 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Rotor Dynamics
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis
Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Running an Analysis
3

Review of the Analysis Form 250

Translation Parameters 255

Solution Types 261

Direct Text Input 266

Solution Parameters 267

Select Superelements 342

Subcases 344

Subcase Parameters 347

Output Requests 405

Select Superelements 342

Select Explicit MPCs... 433

Non-Structural Mass Properties 434
 Select NSM Properties... 439
 Subcase Select 441
 Restart Parameters 444
 Optimize 450

Toptomize 452

Interactive Analysis 460
250 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Review of the Analysis Form

3.1 Review of the Analysis Form


The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran mainform, is chosen. To run
an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other
forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution
parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on the following pages. For
further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 251
Review of the Analysis Form

Analysis Form
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis
run, select Analyze as the Action.

Actions can be set to: Analyze or


Optimize or Toptomize
Access Results
Read Input File
Delete
Monitor (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).
Abort (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).

Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as


defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 439) in the Patran
Reference Manual.

List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected,


the name will appear in the Job Name list box and all
parameters for this job will be retrieved from the database.
An existing job can be submitted again by simply selecting it
and pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an existing
job, modify a few parameters and push Apply to submit the
new job.

Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name
for all resulting MD Nastran files and message files.

This text is used to generate the TITLE entry in the MD


Nastran executive control section.

Displays the Translation Parameters form to specify


parameters not directly related to the solution. These are
primarily used by the Application Preferences during the
forward translation.

Displays the Solution Types form to select the desired type of


analysis to run.

Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows you to directly
enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive
Control and File Management sections of the NASTRAN
input file.
Opens the Select Superelements form which allows you to
select the superelements active for the specified job.

Displays the Subcases form to select a list of load cases to


be included in this analysis run. The list of selected load
cases is order dependent.

Displays the Subcase Select form to select a sequence of


subcases associated with an analysis job.
252 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Review of the Analysis Form

The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action.

Object Method
Entire Model Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck

Model Only

Load SimXpert
Selected Group Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck

Model Only

Load SimXpert
Existing Deck Full Run

Load SimXpert
Restart Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck
Interactive Full Run

The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire Model,
Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.
• Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed.
• Selected Group is for specifying the group that contains the model that is to be analyzed. Select
the button Select Group..., under Existing Groups select the desired group, then select Cancel.
The name of the selected group will appear in the Analysis form under Group: . For more
information see The Group Menu (p. 270) in the Patran Reference Manual.
• Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to MD Nastran.
The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix “.bdf” to form the
input filename. This file must reside in the current directory.
You may also use Existing Deck to directly edit the MD Nastran Bulk Data file.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 253
Review of the Analysis Form

• Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only supported for
the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The
Restart Parameters, 444 form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis.
• Interactive analysis utilizes the Patran Preference for MD Nastran capability for performing
visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a modal
analysis solution using MD Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response analysis is then
performed using Patran Analysis: Analyze / Interactive / Full Run. The chain that is followed is
1) using Select Nastran .MASTER... select a .DBALL file, 2) using Create Loading... specify the
loading (for example, Acoustic, Force), 3) using Output Requests... specify the desired output,
and 4) using View Results... view the results.
The Method indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The methods are listed below:
• Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file
is submitted to MD Nastran for complete analysis.
• Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input
file is submitted to MD Nastran for a check run only.
• Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load case,
analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MD
Nastran should be generated.
• Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the model data
including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and
boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.
• Load SimXpert will lauch SimXpert and automatically transfer the finite element model. The
environment variable MSC_SX_HOME must be set to a valid local installation directory of
SimXpert for this capability to be available.

Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal


To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MD Nastran it is necessary only to click the
Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made automatically.
Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more lower-level forms. Several
different analysis examples are considered below.
To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select
form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults
can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired
(e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a
subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make changes.
For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and
make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed from the
Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the linear static case,
subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be selected on the Subcase
Select form or modified on the Subcases form.
254 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Review of the Analysis Form

In the Patran MD Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a Patran load case with some
additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association is further strengthened
since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load
case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will generally be used interchangeably.
When a specific form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 255
Translation Parameters

3.2 Translation Parameters


Translation parameters define output file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options, numbering
offsets, and external include files.
256 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Translation Parameters

Tolerances • Division - prevents divide by zero errors.


• Numerical - determines if two real values are equal.
• Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when generating a
Bulk Data entry field.
Bulk Data Format • Sorted Bulk Data - Sorts Bulk Data entries alphabetically.
• Card Format - Determines whether the real number can be written to a
standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character)
NASTRAN field.
• Write Stored Precision - When ON it writes all data as double precision if
the data double precision information.
• Precision Control Options - Specifies where to round off a grid point
coordinate, material, property, or other entity value before its written out to
the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398
will be written out as 1.34. This option has been implemented for entities:
Grids, Coordinate Frames, MPCs, LBCs, Materials and Properties.
Node Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.
Coordinate Frame Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.
This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not
affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This
determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID
entry.
MD Nastran Version Specifies the version of MD Nastran. The version specified here is used for
two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to
determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and
letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version
number can be overridden by setting the environment variable
“NASTRAN_VERSION”.
Number of Tasks Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is
assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing.
Write Properties on Element Specifies that properties will be written to the element entries for all elements
Entries where it is allowed in MD Nastran.
Write Continuation Markers This option is OFF by default. This option can be turned ON to write
continuation markers for Bulk Data entries.
Write Global Ply IDs When ON, attempts to keep the Global Ply IDs consistent between MD
Nastran and Patran.
Convert CBARs to CBEAMs Converts all CBARs to CBEAMS
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 257
Translation Parameters

Write PARTSuperelement This is ON by default and if ON and superelements are selected (see Select
Superelements, 342 then BEGIN BULK SUPER = id sections are written in to
the input file for each selected superelement. If OFF and superelements are
selected, then SESET entries are written instead to define the superelements.
Geometry Check Checks the element shapes to make sure they are valid. You can set different
warning levels from None to Fatal depending on how crucial the element
shapes are to your model.
Use Iterative Solver Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis manger does not
support this option and must be disabled when using this option.
Ext. Superelement Spec... Subform used for defining superelement specifications.
Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned
during translation.
Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.
258 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Translation Parameters

External Superelement Specifications


With this form you can define the options for the External Superelements Bulk Data entry. Please see the
MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about External Superelements.

The available methods are:


NONE – No EXTSEOUT entry created.
DMIGPCH – Requires an EXTID
MATRIXDB
DMIGDB
DMIGOP2

ASM BULK and EXT BULK require the


EXTID method.

Numbering Options
This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It allows
the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For example, if the
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 259
Translation Parameters

user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the
resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101.

The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the user to


specify the continuation of the mnemonic format
used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries.

IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to activate


recognition of IDs encoded into the name of any
named entity, such as a material.

Number Only will recognize and use an ID if, and


only if, the name of the entity is an actual number
like “105.” This option is ON by default.
Beginning Number will recognize an ID if the
number begins the name, such as
“52_shell_property.” This option is OFF by default.
Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the
name, such as “shell_property_52.” This option is
OFF by default.
Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly
follows the first occurrence of the specified syntax.
For example, with this option activated and the
specified syntax set to “.”, the ID assigned to a
material given the name “Steel_1027.32” would be
32.

Note that both the Patran Neutral file reader and the Patran MD Nastran input file reader preserve the IDs
of named entities with a “.” syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will be assigned the
name “PSHELL.12.” This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model
data. This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is “.”.
260 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Translation Parameters

Select File
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 261
Solution Types

3.3 Solution Types


The Solution Type form defines the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the
Solution Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters, 267, Subcase
Parameters, 347, and Output Requests, 405. See Table 3-1.

To set the Solution Type:


Click on the Analysis Application button.
262 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Types

On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select the Solution Type from the list of
available Solution Types.
For Analysis Type Explicit Nonlinear:

Solution Type Defines the solution type.


• Linear Static Selects Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the
selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in
SOLs 1 and 101.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 263
Solution Types

• Nonlinear Static Selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending on the version of MD


Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above
yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases.
• Normal Modes Selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution
Parameters. You may select only one subcase.
• Buckling Selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution
Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static
preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output
requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The
default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and
constraint forces.
• Complex Eigenvalue Selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase.
• Frequency Response Selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the
selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for
Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111,
multiple subcases may be selected.
• Transient Response Selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution
Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases
may be selected.
• Nonlinear Transient Selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MD Nastran
Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields
SOL 129. You may select only one subcase.
• Implicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 400 or 600 (depending on “SOL400RUN*
toggle).
• DDAM Solution Selects Solution Sequence 187, Dynamic Design Analysis Method
(DDAM).
• Explicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 700.
264 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Types

Select ASET/QSET...

• Select existing Degree of Freedom Lists for use in making an ASET or


a QSET in the input file.
• The ASET toggle creates a user selected unreferenced SPOINTS in the
ASET of input file.
• The QSET toggle creates a user selected number of unreferenced
SPOINTS in the QSET of the input file.
Solution Parameters... Brings up a solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to
specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.

Solution
Database Cyclic Parameter
Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Settings
Linear Static Off Off -- -- 1
Off On -- -- 47
On Off -- -- 101
On On -- -- 114
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 265
Solution Types

Solution
Database Cyclic Parameter
Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Settings
Nonlinear Static -- -- -- 66 or Below 66
-- -- -- 67 or Above 106
Normal Modes Off Off -- -- 3
Off On -- -- 48
On Off -- -- 103
On On -- -- 115
Buckling Off Off -- -- 5
On On -- -- 77
On Off -- -- 105
Complex Off -- Direct -- 28
Eigenvalue
Off -- Modal -- 29
On -- Direct -- 107
On -- Modal -- 110
Frequency Off -- Direct -- 26
Response
Off -- Modal -- 30
On Off Direct -- 108
On -- Modal -- 111
On On Direct -- 118
Transient Off -- Direct -- 27
Response
Off -- Modal -- 31
On -- Direct -- 109
On -- Modal -- 112
Nonlinear -- -- -- 66 or Below 99
Transient
-- -- -- 67 or Above 129
Implicit 400
Nonlinear
600
DDAM 2004 187
Solution
Explicit 2005 700
Nonlinear
266 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Direct Text Input

3.4 Direct Text Input


This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and
BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for
any unsupported entries in the input file. If the data is entered by the user the Write to Input Deck toggle
default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF.
These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files
subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON.
Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input file before the first subcase. The Direct
Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a subcase definition.

Switches to determine which data section the MD


Nastran input would be sent.

Saves the current Resets the form back Resets all four
setting and data for the Clears the current to the data values it forms back to its
four sections and form. had at the last OK. previous value and
closes the form. closes the form.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 267
Solution Parameters

3.5 Solution Parameters

Linear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type
form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry
parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file.
268 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Database Run Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or
a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.
Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47).
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
Inertia Relief Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-
1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic
Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation
must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to
the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT
entry will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.
Alternate Reduction Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired.
The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is
also selected
SOL 600 Run Indicates a SOL 600 run.
Contact Parameters Same as the contact parameters available for the Implicit Nonlinear solution type.
Only used with linear contact capability.
Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 269
Solution Parameters

Default Initial Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry
Temperature TEMP(INITIAL)
Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry
TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.
Rigid Element Type: The Rigid element type optionmenu presents three different types of rigid elements,
corresponding to the three possible values for the Nastran RIGID= case control. They
are:

• LINEAR: Selects linear rigid elements, which are the rigid elements that
have been available in MD Nastran since its inception.
• LAGR: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange multplier
method.
• LGELIM: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange
elimination method.
See the Nastran quick reference quide for more details.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be
used.

Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL

On Off 101
On On 114
Off Off 1
Off On 47

Nonlinear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type
form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MD Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then
Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MD Nastran version specified is version
67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed except as described below. For more
270 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

information about specification of the MD Nastran version number, see the Translation Parameters, 255
form.

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MD Nastran will automatically constrain


model singularities.

Indicates that displacements, which can


cause a difference in the formulation of the
stiffness matrix, may be encountered.
Therefore, the stiffness matrix may need to
be periodically recomputed based on the
displaced shape.

Indicates, as the part deflects, that the


applied forces will remain aligned with the
deformed part rather than maintaining their
global orientation. This can only be selected
if Large Displacements is also selected.

The default solution sequence for Nonlinear


Static is 106, but can be changed to any one
of the following if desired: 400, 600, 700.
Only features of 106 are used in any case.
For specific features particular to 600 or 700,
please use the Implicit Nonlinear type or set
the Analysis Type to Explicit Nonlinear,
respectively.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 271
Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered
LGDISP parameter setting for each.

Large Displacements Follower Forces LGDISP


Off On -1
On On 1
On Off 2

This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters, that were
not shown on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
272 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Normal Modes
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 input file, depending on
the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 274. Not shown


unless Cyclic Symmetry is on. If the version is Version
Š 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then
these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes
Subcase Parameters, 354 form.

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL
type for each. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be used, or a
Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.

Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL


On Off 103
On On 115
Off Off 3
Off On 48
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 273
Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that were not
shown on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or 48).
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.
Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO
to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The
Computation default is to calculate residual vectors.
Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled
or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be
set to -1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print
file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This
parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point
singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the setting of the TIME Executive
Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.
Rigid Element Type There are three ways to define a rigid element. They are 1) Linear, 2) Lagrangian,
or 3) Lgelim.
Max p-Adaptive Cycles Specify the maximum number of p-Adaptive cycles.
274 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Parameter Name Description


• Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic
reduction controls.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to
use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format,
338.

Real Eigenvalue Extraction


This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes,
Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears when the Real
Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameter form. Use this
form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any
one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens,
Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If
this selection is set to Lanczos, an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise,
this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of


frequencies to be examined. These are the F1
and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the
V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Indicates an estimate of the number of


eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can
only be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power.
This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data
entry.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 275
Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on
the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on
the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3.
This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is
the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can
take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be
specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM
field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if
Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This
can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot
be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR
Bulk Data entry.
276 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Dynamic Reduction Parameters


This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes,
Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this
form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry.

A flag that indicates whether or not any


dynamic reduction is desired.

Indicates the maximum frequency to be


considered when performing dynamic
reduction. This parameter can only be
selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction
is set to ON. This is the FMAX field.

Indicates which method is to be used in


selecting coordinates. This parameter
can be set to either Automatic or
Manual. This parameter can only be
selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction
is set to ON. This determines if the
program will automatically select the
number of generalized coordinates.

Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic reduction. This
parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Method of
Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatically create
this many SPOINTs, and place them in the a-set and the q-set.
Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic reduction.
This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, and
Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 277
Solution Parameters

Buckling
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting
of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will automatically


constrain model singularities.

Indicates whether a Structured Solution


Sequence (SOL 105) is to be used or a
Rigid Format or unstructured Solution
Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If Database Run
is selected, a Structured Solution
Sequence will be selected.

Indicates that this model is a sector of a


cyclically repeating part.

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction,


274.
278 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL
type for each.

Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL


On Off 105
On On 77
Off Off 5

This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not shown
on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
• Eigenvalue Extraction Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue
extraction controls.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 279
Solution Parameters

Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction


This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling
Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending
on the selected extraction method.

Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the
following: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be
created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB entry will be created with the
METHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respectively.

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of


eigenvalues to be examined. These are the L1 and
L2 fields on the EIGB entry or the V1 and V2 fields
on the EIGRL entry.

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues


to be located. This parameter can only be specified
if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power. This is
the NEP field on the EIGB entry.

Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be


computed. This value can only be selected if
Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is the
NP field on the EIGRL entry.
280 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, that was not shown
on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Number of Desired Positive Roots Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be computed. This
value can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or
Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry.
Number of Desired Negative Roots Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be computed. This
value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or
Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN field on the EIGB entry.
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value in the
range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk
Data entry.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This
parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This parameter
cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the
NORM field on the EIGB entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected
if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified
if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be
used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point.
This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos.
This is the C field on the EIGB entry.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 281
Solution Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Complex Eigenvalue is selected. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from
the Solution Type form), Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.

See Complex Eigenvalue Extraction, 284.

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction,


274.

See Dynamic Reduction Parameters,


276.
282 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type
for each. If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or 110) will be selected.
If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.

Database Run Formulation SOL


On Direct 107
On Modal 110
Off Direct 28
Off Modal 29

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters that was
not shown on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to
the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default
Computation is to calculate residual vectors.
Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 283
Solution Parameters

Parameter Name Description


Default Inital Specify the initial temperature.
Temperature
Default Load Specify load temperature.
Temperature
Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,
PARAM, G, value).
• Complex Eigenvalue Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the complex
eigenvalue extraction controls.
• Real Eigenvalue Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real eigenvalue
extraction controls.
• Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic
reduction controls.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
284 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue Extraction


This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex
Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry.

Defines the method to use to extract the complex


eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one
of the following: Complex Lanczos, Upper
Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This
defines the setting of the METHOD field.

Defines the real component of the beginning of


lines in the complex plane. These values cannot
be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are
the ALPHAAJ fields.

Defines the real component of the end of lines in


the complex plane. These values cannot be
selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex
Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of
real values. They are the ALPHABJ fields.

Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be
selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the
OMEGAAJ fields.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 285
Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown
on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Omega of B Points Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These
values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields.
Width of Regions Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value cannot be selected
if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list
of real values. They are the LJ fields.
Estimated Number of Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located within the specified
Roots region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos
or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ fields.
Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed within the specified
region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos
or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NDJ fields.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can
take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the NORM field on the EIGC
entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the G field on the EIGC Bulk
Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This
can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Determinate. This
is the C field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry.
286 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Frequency Response
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Frequency Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you
specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 274.

See Dynamic Reduction Parameters, 276.

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry
parameters, and the altered SOL type for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence
(SOLs 108, 111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 26 or 30) will be
selected.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 287
Solution Parameters

Database Run Formulation Cyclic Symmetry SOL


On Direct Off 108
On Direct On 118
On Modal -- 111
Off Direct -- 26
Off Modal -- 30

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters that were
not shown on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and the appropriate
flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run is selected and Formulation is
set to Direct (SOL 118).
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to
the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default
Computation is to calculate residual vectors.
Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
288 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Parameter Name Description


Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.
Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature.
Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,
PARAM, G, value).
• Eigenvalue Extraction Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue
extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to
Modal.
• Dynamic Reduction Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These
parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 289
Solution Parameters

Transient Response
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Transient Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify
Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

These options are only available


for a "Modal" solution.
290 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type
for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected.
If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected.

Database Run Formulation SOL


On Direct 109
On Modal 112
Off Direct 27
Off Modal 31

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown
on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to
the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default
Computation is to calculate residual vectors.
SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.
SOL 700 Run Select this to perform a SOL 700 analysis. To do this is necessary to use the Direct
method.
Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.
This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter
can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 291
Solution Parameters

Parameter Name Description


Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.
Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature.
Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,
PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics
of the model.
W4, Damping Factor1
• Eigenvalue Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue
Extraction extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to
Modal.
• Dynamic Reduction Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define the dynamic
reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to
Modal.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
292 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Nonlinear Transient
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file,
depending on the version of MD Nastran indicated on the translation parameter form except as indicated
below. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will
constrain model singularities.

The default solution sequence for Nonlinear


Transient is 129, but can be changed to any one of
the following if desired: 400, 600, 700. Only features
of 129 are used in any case. For specific features
particular to 600 or 700, please use the Implicit
Nonlinear type or set the Analysis Type to Explicit
Nonlinear, respectively.

Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within


MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the
COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set
to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled,
COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be
set to -1.

Indicates how the data file entry images are to be


printed in theMD Nastran print file. This controls the
setting used for the ECHO Case Control command.
This parameter can have one of three settings:
Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 293
Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters that was
not shown on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,
PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of
the model.
W4, Damping Factor
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
294 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type
form when Implicit Nonlinear is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 400 or 600 input file.

The default solution sequence for Implicit


Nonlinear is 600. By toggling the “SOL 400
Run” ON, Patran will write a SOL 400 input
file. Not all features of SOL 600 are
accessible using SOL 400, so use with
caution and check your input file and results
carefully.

Solver / Options... See Solver Options Subform (SOL 600), 296.


Contact Parameters... See Contact Parameters Subform, 297.
Direct Text Input... This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive
Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections of the MD Nastran input file. See
Direct Text Input, 266.
Restart Parameters... See Restart Parameters Subform, 305.
Advanced Job Control... See Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600), 307.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 295
Solution Parameters

Domain Decomposition... See Domain Decomposition, 308.


Assumed Strain For SOL 600, if ON, (default is ON), places the MARCASUM parameter into the
input file. This forces all elements that can deal with assumed strain to use this
formulation. This improves the bending behavior of Marc elements 3, 7, and 11. For
SOL 400, the NLMOPTS entry is written with the ASSUM option. Again, this is a
global setting and forces all elements that can use this formulation to adopt it.
Constant Dilatation If ON, (default is OFF), places the MARCDILT parameter into the input file. This
will force all elements that can deal with constant dilatation (for nearly
incompressible analysis) to use this formulation. This affects Marc element types 7,
10, 11, 19, and 20 only and recommended for elastic-plastic and creep analysis. (SOL
600 only)
Plane Stress Replaces plane strain elements with plane stress elements. (SOL 600 only)
Reduced Integration Specifies that a lower number of element integration points be used to integrate
exactly. (SOL 600 only)
Creep For SOL 400, writes the NLMOPTS entry with the CREEP option defaults for creep
analysis.
Shell Shear Correction For SOL 400 (only), forces all shell elements using nonlinear formulations to use the
shear correction. This writes the NLMOPTS entry with the TSHEAR option.
SOL 400 Run Use this to select a SOL 400 simulation, instead of a SOL 600 simulation.
Default Initial or Load For SOL 400 allows for specification of a general initial temperature and a general
Temperature loading temperature. TEMPD entries are written for both with Case Control
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TEMPERATURE(LOAD) entries calling out the
corresponding TEMPD entries in the bulk data.
Results Output Format... On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.
296 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Solver Options Subform (SOL 600)


Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting the system matrix of linear equilibrium equations.

Inconsistent MPCs There are three choices for dealing with problem MPCs, 1) Reorder
(reorder the DOFs that are used to define the problem MPCs), 2) Continue
(continue the analysis with no changes to the MPCs DOFs), or 3) Stop (stop
the analysis).
Solver Type Chooses Direct Profile, Iterative Sparse, Direct Sparse , Hardware Sparse,
Multifrontal Sparse (default), or External Sparse as the solver.
Non-Symmetric Specifies non-symmetric for Solver Type of Direct Profile or Multifrontal
Sparse.
Non-Positive Definite Specifies non-positive definite option valid for all solver types, use ON. On
by default in SOL 600, use Nastran Default. Can un select this option by
using OFF.
Memory Defines the amount of work space in words. This can be left blank and the
translator will automatically determine this based on model size.
Multifrontal Sparse Parameters
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 297
Solution Parameters

• Out-of-Core Threshold For Hardware and Multifrontal Sparse solvers only. Default is 100.
Represents the number of real*4 words in millions of words. Only for SGI
computers running the IRIX operating system.
Bandwidth Optimization Turns on the optimize option for the Direct Profile or Multifrontal Sparse
solvers and uses the Sloan algorithm. Other solvers have their own
optimizer and use it by default.

Contact Parameters Subform


Defines options for detecting and handling contact.
298 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Deformable-Deformable In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both bodies
Method will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each contact body
pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for contact.
Results are dependent upon the order in which contact bodies are defined.
Optimize Constraint Equations Use this to decrease the bandwidth of the model.
Contact Detection... See Contact Detection Subform, 299.
Separation... See Separation Subform, 301.
Friction Parameters... See Friction Parameters Subform, 302.
Enable Initial Contact Click on checkbox to activate the capability for control of initial contact.
The initial contact is for creating an MD Nastran entry BCTABLE with ID
= 0 to be used for increment 0. For SOL 600, this causes rigid contact
bodies to be moved so they just touch adjacent flexible contact bodies. For
SOL 101 and 400, a BCTABLE is used with ID = 0, which causes rigid
contact bodies to be moved, as for SOL 600, and/or adjusting the
coordinates of all active nodes on the surface of all deformable BCBODYs
to remove any prestressed condition.
Initial Contact... See Initial Contact Subform, 304.
Penetration Check This controls contact penetration checking, sometimes referred to as the
increment splitting option. Available options are: At End of Increment, Per
Iteration (default), Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive). At End of
Increment means penetration is checked at the end of a load increment. Per
Iteration means that penetration is checked at the end of every iteration
within an increment. If penetration is detected, increments are split.
Suppress is to suppress this feature for Fixed and Adaptive load stepping
types.
Reduce Printout of This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.
Surface Definition
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 299
Solution Parameters

Contact Detection Subform


On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This form controls general
contact parameters for contact detection.
300 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Distance Tolerance Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (error). Leave the
box blank to have MSC.Marc calculate the tolerance as the smaller of 1/20
element edge length or 1/4 shell thickness.
Bias on Distance Tolerance Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range of zero to
one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this parameter. You may
need to experiment with this value if you have shell element models that will
not converge. The SOL 600 default is 0.9.
Suppress Bounding Box Check Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding box checking. This might
eliminate penetration, but slows down the solution.
Include Outside (Solid Element) When detecting contact of elements (beam/bar, shell, solid elements) use this to
include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to the BCPARA
entry (contact parameters) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for
the BCPARA entry are ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and
ITOPSD (solid).
Include Outside (Rigid Surface) When detecting contact of rigid surfaces use this to include contact of the edges
of the surfaces. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters) of
the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are
ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid).
Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses the
layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom
Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate
flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore
Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd
data block.
Include Edges Use this to detect contact of edges. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and
Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters)
of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are
ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid).
Activate Quadratic Contact Use this to detect the contact of the edges of quadratic elements (midside
nodes).
Activate 3D Beam-Beam Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact. Activate 3D Beam-
Contact Beam Contact enters a one(1) in the 13th field of the 2nd data block. This creates
the MD Nastran Bulk Data entry BCPARA, and uses the entry BEAMP.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 301
Solution Parameters

Separation Subform
On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form controls general contact
parameters for contact separation.

Maximum Separations Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Maximum


Separations is entered in the 6th field of the 2nd data block. Default is 9999.
Retain Value on NCYCLE Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE to zero when separation
occurs. This speeds up the solution, but might result in instabilities. You can not
set this and Suppress Bounding Box simultaneously. Retain Value of NCYCLE
enters a three(3) in field 8 of the 2nd data block.
Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment and Chattering enters
the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and the critical value at
which the separation will take place. Increment and Chattering enters the
appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
302 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the separation is allowed to occur.
Separation Criterion enters a one(1) in the 12th field of the 2nd data block if
separation is based on stresses.
Force Value Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block.
Stress Value

Friction Parameters Subform


On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 303
Solution Parameters

Friction Type Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal forming),
Coulomb (for normal contact), Shear for Rolling, Coulomb for Rolling, Stick-
Slip, Bilinear Shear, and Bilinear Coulomb. The MD Nastran entry BCPARA is
written to the .bdf file, with FTYPE used. Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depending on fiction type, and places a
0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal forces or
nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction. Stick-Slip is a Coulomb type
friction.
Method For Coulomb type of friction models (options 2, 4, and 5 above), there are 2
methods for computing friction: Nodal Stress, Nodal Force (default). Type and
Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depending
on fiction type, and places a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction
based on nodal forces or nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction.
Relative Sliding Velocity Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be simulated as
sticking. Relative Sliding Velocity is placed in the 1st field of the 3rd data block
for all friction models except Stick-Slip.
Transition Region Slip-to-Stick transition region. Transition Region is placed in the 1st field of the
3rd data block for Stick-Slip model.
Multiplier to Friction Friction coefficient multiplier. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction
Coefficient Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block
respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model.
Friction Force Tolerance Friction Force Tolerance. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction Force
Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block respectively for
the Stick-Slip friction model.
Heat Generation Conversion A factor related to how much heat is generated by the friction process.
Factor
304 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Initial Contact Subform


On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Initial Contact...
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 305
Solution Parameters

Restart Parameters Subform


Includes a Restart option in the MD Nastran input file. Restarts are only supported for SOL 600 in the
current release.

Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write restart data. The
default is None for no restart data.
Create Continuous Results If when restarting a job, you wish the results form the previous run to be copied
File into the new POST file, then turn this ON. This will place the RESTART or
RESTART LAST options before the POST option in the input file. Otherwise
they are placed after the POST option which flags MSC.Marc not to copy the
results to the new POST file. If you turn this ON, you must have a
restarname.t16 and/or restartname.t19 file in your local directory or
the MSC.Marc analysis will fail.
Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON by default.
Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the input file. Any additional
data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the first Load Step
information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is set to Read or Read and
Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle visible to the user.
306 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Restart from Increment Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select Restart File
form. This is entered in the 3rd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART
option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write.
The last increment on the restart file is used for the RESTART LAST option
when Last Converged Increment is ON.
Increments Between Writing Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file. This is
entered in the 2nd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART option. It is only
requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and Write. When Last
Converted Increment is ON, this is the 4th field of the 2nd data block of the
RESTART LAST option.
Select Restart File... This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart Type is set
to Read or Read and Write. This file is specified on the command line for
invoking the MSC.Marc solver using the -r option.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 307
Solution Parameters

Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600)


Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the results file, for SOL 600 jobs.

Marc Version Specifies the version of MSC.Marc to run the analysis.


Marc Results File Format Specifies the file format for the output from the analysis.
Marc Results File Type Defines the binary output and/or text format of output from the analysis.
Binary is recommended since .t16 files are linarily compatible across
platforms and take up less space.
308 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Marc scratch files w/ Nastran’s


Use Environment Variables Use to enable the use of environment variables.
Suppress Non-SOLMARC Errors Suppress errors that are not SOL 600 errors.
Submit Marc Job Submit SOL 600 jobs to Marc.
Use Marc License Use this to search for, then use Marc licenses.
Copy Marc Files Make copies of Marc files; for example copy .t16 file.
Filter Marc Text
Delete Marc Files Delete Marc files after the corresponding Patran files are created.
Gradually Release Constraints
Analysis Control Defaults Creates the Nastran Bulk Data entry PARAM, MARCDEF. Its three values
are Nastran Development (recommended by Nastran development; Marc
SHELL_SECT parameter is set to 11), Marc-Mentat (current Marc
standard), Marc Development (recommended by both Marc and Nastran
development).
Marc Submit Command Locates the submit command to run the MSC.Marc analysis (optional). For
Specify Full Command its list box will be un-ghosted.

Domain Decomposition
Domain Decomposition is used to partition the model into seperate parts (domains) for parallel
processing. The Method used to do this is named Domain Decomposition Method (DDM). This form
designates that domain decomposition be done manually, semi-automatically, or automatically, for either
SOL 400 or SOL 600 jobs.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 309
Solution Parameters
310 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Decomposition Method Set this to Automatic if you wish MD Nastran to automatically create the
domains during analysis run time. Set to Semi-Automatic if you wish to
have MSC.Patran automatically break the model into domains which can be
visualized before submittal. Set to Manual to have full control over the
domains. This requires the creation of the groups before they can be
selected here in this form and associated to a domain.
Number of Domains This determines how many domains are to be created. When you change
this number and press the Enter or Return key, the spread sheet updates with
this number of rows. The default is 1. This corresponds to the number of
CPUs desired to run the job. For the Automatic method, this is the only
input that is required and the spreadsheet is not visible.
Model or Current Group This is for choosing a part of the model to decompose for parallel
processing: Model -- decompose all of the model, Current Group --
decompose just the current group. This choice must be consistent with what
part of the model is specified for analysis (Analysis: Analyze / Entire Model
or Selected Group). This is only active if Decomposition Method is set to
Automatic or Semi-Automatic.
Metis Method There are three Methods that can be used to partition the Model or Current
Group into Domains. They are, 1) Nodal Position, 2) Element Topology, or
3) Best (a procedure that accounts for the best of the nodal, element, or
vector type algorithms). This method can only be used if Decomposition
Method is set to Automatic.
Domain Island Removal Using this option causes some parts of disjoint domains (domain islands) to
be combined with adjacent domains. This can only be used if
Decomposition Method is set to Automatic.
Coarse Graph Using this option sometimes produces domain islands (disjoint domains).
This option (the default) is recommended to reduce the time to decompose
the initial global domain. Use this only if there is a definite need for a better
decomposition. This can only be used if Decomposition Method is set to
Automatic.
Single POST File If more than one CPU processor is used to solve the problem, the
seperate/multiple results files can be compiled into a single file for
postprocessing using Single POST File.
Create Click Create to create Domain Information spreadsheet rows. After doing
this the number of rows will equal the value of Number of Domains in the
form. If Decomposition Method is set to Manual, the previously created
group names will be selectable in Select a Group window at the bottom.
Visualize This is used to display groups. Select a group name for the heading Domain
Information under Group. Click Visualize to display just that group. This
can be done for some or all of the groups.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 311
Solution Parameters

Reset Graphics Click Reset Graphics to reset the viewport graphics.


Validate This is for validating (checking) that the domains are not disjoint. For two
adjacent domains, the nodes at the interface of the domains must be in both
domains.
Domain Information The window with the definition of each Domain. For a given Domain there
is a corresponding unique Group name.

DDAM
DDAM is an acronym for Dynamic Design Analysis Method, or DDAM is a methodology for analyzing
ship-mounted equipment that the US Navy uses in the event of a near-miss underwater. Most FEA
products follow the DDAM methodology, as does any hand calculation. MSC has made several
improvements to its products that make DDAM easier to use.
To accommodate the special spectrum and summing conventions MSC made several modifications to
MD Nastran. A DMAP alter in MD Nastran puts out data important for a DDAM analysis. A stand-alone
Fortran program reads the MD Nastran data, calculates the spectral data, formats DDAM run
information, and sends data back to MD Nastran for further postprocessing.
MSC’s DDAM has the following capabilities.
• Calculates all three shock directions simultaneously.
• Automatically calculates the appropriate spectra from input of the coefficients.
• Performs the NRL sum.
• Contains modal selection following 3010 Rev 1 convention.
• Provides manual mode selection if needed.
• Provides mode-by-mode output if desired.
• Uses all available MD Nastran elements.
• Provides NRL summed output in MD Nastran OP2 format for use with most postprocessors.
• Offers an alternate coefficient input method is available that avoids using the Fortran program,
but the classified coefficients must be entered directly in the data file.
• Has unlimited model size.
• Uses MSC’s Lanczos Eigenvalue solver for fast solutions.

DDAM has the following limitations.


• All base input points must be rigidly connected to a single grid flagged on a SUPORT entry.
• There is no easy method to handle closely spaced modes as defined by 3010.
• MD Nastran printed output (.f06 file) is not labeled well, and must be used carefully in order to
avoid mistakes. This is especially true of the mode-by-mode output.
• A DDAM data file will not read into Patran/MSC.FEA completely.
312 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

• .XDB output not available for NRL summed quantities


• MD Nastran requires additional input switch to be toggled in Patran in order to plot NRL
summed von Mises and combined beam stresses.
• MD Nastran does not calculate beam and bar shear stresses. They are not included in the von
Mises and combined stresses reported by MD Nastran DDAM.

DDAM in Patran
DDAM in MD Nastran is a process that involves three main parts, and a number of smaller parts. The
entire procedure is accessed from a simple interface in Patran that integrates the process.
• Part 1, Modal Analysis - A modal analysis is run in MD Nastran. This supplies the frequencies,
mode shapes and modal participation for the model.
• Part 2, Spectrum Generation – Using the output from Part 1, you can use a Fortran program to
calculate the shock spectrum. This is based on the DDS-072 or NRL 1396 documents, or you can
manually enter your own spectrum.
• Part 3, Spectrum Application and Data Recovery – The calculated spectrum from Part 2 is
applied to the mode shapes calculated in Part 1, and the results are calculated on a mode-by-
mode basis. The results from this are then summed using an NRL sum to produce results, one set
for each shock direction.
The Patran interface presents you with a selection of options to calculate the spectrum and sum the
results. The options are stored, and when the MD Nastran modal analysis completes, the Fortran program
automatically starts, using the stored options to drive it. MD Nastran automatically resumes after the
completion of the Fortran program and finishes the analysis.
During is process, a number of files will be created that are inputs and outputs from this process, all
named jobname.xxx using the jobname chosen in Patran. The most important files are:
jobname.ddd – the DDAM potions file that drives the Fortran program
jobname.f11 – the modal information needed to calculate the spectrum
jobname.f13 – the calculated spectra information for input back into MD Nastran
jobname.ver – modal verification file
jobname.opw – Nastran OP2 file with the mode shapes
jobname.opx – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for x-shock
jobname.opy – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for y-shock
jobname.opz – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for z-shock
Once the run is complete, you can look over both the results and the modal verification file. If the results
are not as expected or desired, there are a number of more advanced capabilities of this DDAM procedure
for more control over the process. These include some that are on the Patran forms (changes in 80%
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 313
Solution Parameters

criterion, minimum G value) and ones that can be accessed using the Patran Direct Text capability (mode-
by-mode output, specific mode selection).

DDAM Model Preparation


In order to run DDAM, all of the fixed base points (excitation inputs) in the model must be rigidly
connected to a single point. The MD Nastran RBE2 element is used for this, connecting the independent
node (the SUPORT point) to all of the other fixed base/excitation points (dependent grids) in all 6 degrees
of freedom. This point is flagged for the SUPORT entry in the DDAM setup. It is not necessary that this
point is separated (spatially) from the other input points, you can select one of the base points to be the
SUPORT point, as long as all the excitation points are then connected to it. It is not advisable to have any
other translational constraints in the model, as they will remove modal mass from the model and the 80%
criterion will not necessarily be correct, and the model will have base points that will not be excited. You
may have rotational constraints to hold shafting and to remove plate and bar singularities, as the
rotational components are not used in the DDAM excitation.
No loads or other boundary conditions are needed for the analysis. As per 3010, you need to add
operating loads to the shock loads at the conclusion of the analysis. Set up the model like any other modal
analysis, with the exception of the SUPORT point. Mass and material density are required to obtain
correct mode shapes. The modal analysis parameters are set up on the Subcase Options form, where you
can select the number of desired modes, the lower frequency bound, and an upper frequency bound. The
analysis uses a Lanczos extraction routine with mass normalization, and uses the default Lanczos
debugging information level. You will not have control over these parameters in DDAM.
314 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

DDAM Solution Parameters


This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type
form when DDAM is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 187 input file.

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MD Nastran will automatically
constrain model singularities.
Shell Normal Tol. Angle Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Mass Calculation
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 315
Solution Parameters

• Lumped Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the
• Coupled setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled
or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be
set to -1.
Data Deck Echo
• None Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print
• Sorted file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This
parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
• Unsorted
Plate Rz Stiffness factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point
singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node id for Wt. Gener Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Default Initial Temperature Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry
TEMP(INITIAL)
Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry
TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.
SUPPORT Node Selects the point you have chosen for your base input. Note that this is a required
choice with no default, and that you can only pick one node. If multiple nodes are
entered in the data box, only the first one is used.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to
use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format,
338.
316 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Explicit Nonlinear
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type
form when Explicit Nonlinear is selected under Preferences: Analysis... . Use this form to generate a SOL
700 input file.

Parameter Name Description


Large Displacements Use this to cause the large displacement formulation to be used.
Follower Forces Use this to cause the forces to move (translate and rotate) with the model.
Prestress Option Use this to cause the pre-stresses to be calculated.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 317
Solution Parameters

Parameter Name Description


Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This
is the GRDPNT parameter.
SOL 700 Default Settings Either Dytran or Ls-Dyna default settings can be used.
• Sol700 Parameters... Displays the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form that is used for specifing
parameter values for such things as execution control, dynamic relaxation (entry
DAMPGBL), general parameters, contact, and Eulerian parameters. See Sol700
Parameters Subform, 317
• Resultts Output Use this to specify the types of files that are to be written for the SOL 700 analysis.
Format... For example, XDB (jobname.xdb) and Print (jobname.f06).See Results Output
Format, 338

Sol700 Parameters Subform


This subordinate form appears when Sol700 Parameters button is selected on the Solution Parameters
form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
318 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP,
Parameters... DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS
Dynamic This is for specifying the entries for the DAMPGBL Bulk Data entry. This is
Relaxation... for defining parameter values for static analysis using dynamic relaxation for
SOL 700 only.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 319
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
General DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,
Parameters... DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,
DYSHNIP
Contact DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,
Parameters... DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE,
DYCONSKIPTWG
Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH,
Database File DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG,
Parameters... DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ,
DYN3THDT
Time History Output This is for specifying the type of output file (Binary, ASCII, Both), and the
Request... Output Time Interval.
Hourglass Setting... See Hourglass Setting Subform, 319
Merge Rigid Mat... See Merge Rigid Material Subform, 321
Dynamic Relaxation See Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform, 323
for Restart...
Damping Per See Damping Per Property Subform, 325
Property...
Rigid Body Switch See Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform, 327
and Merge...
Eulerian See Eulerian Parameters Subform, 333
Parameters...
SPH Control See SPH Control Parameters Subform, 336
Parameters...

Hourglass Setting Subform


This subordinate form appears when Hourglass Setting button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and
Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available
such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
320 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 321
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Existing Hourglass List of previously created hourglass settings.
Setting
Hourglass Name Specify the name.
Property Type Specify either a Shell (2D) or Solid (3D) element type.
Control Type Choose one of several types of controlling the hourglass effects. The choices
are: 1) Standard LSDyna Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 2)
Flanagan-Belytschko Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 3) Flan-Bely.
Visc. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type
= Solid), 4) Flanagan-Belytschko Stiffness (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 5)
Flan-Bely. Stiff. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements)
(Property Type = Solid), 6) Flanagan-Bindeman Stiffness (Property Type =
Solid), 7) Fully Integrated Shell (Property Type = Shell). These entries are
defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran
Coefficient Quick Reference Guide.
Warping Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran
Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.
Bending Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran
Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.
Linear Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran
Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.
Quadr. Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran
Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.
Select Property Set Select a previously created element property. For example, Properties > Create
> 2D > Shell > Options: Explicit PSHELL1 > Input Properties... > Shell
Formulations > HUGHES.
Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Hourglass Setting form to
create an Existing Hourglass Setting.
Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Hourglass Setting form to
update an Existing Hourglass Setting. You must first select the particular
Existing Hourglass Setting.

Merge Rigid Material Subform


This subordinate form appears when Merge Rigid Mat button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and
Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available
such as:
322 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 323
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Existing Merged List of previously merged MATRIG materials. MATRIG is an MD Nastran
Materials Bulk Data entry for defining rigid body properties.
Merged Material Specify the name of merged material to be created.
Name
Select Material to be Specify the name of an MATRIG material to merge other MATRIG materials
Merged into into.
Select Materials to Specify the names of MATRIG materials that are to be merged into the merged
be Merged material whos name is specified under Merged Material Name.
Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Rigid Materials form to create
an Existing Merged Materials.
Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Rigid Materials form to
update an Existing Merged Materials. You must first select the particular
Existing Merged Materials.

Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform


This subordinate form appears when Dynamic Relaxation for Restart button is selected on the Sol700
Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where
Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
324 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Relaxation Use this to not use (None Active) or use (Activated Relaxation) relaxation in
performing the simulation.
[Termination Time] The time to stop the simulation. This is optional ([ ]).
Convergence Specify convergence tolerance.
Tolerance
Number of Specify the maximum number of iterations.
Iterations
Papadrakakis Auto Click the checkbox to specify that convergence control is to be automatic
Control using the Papadrakakis method.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 325
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
Papadrakakis To use this it is necessary to not select Papadrakakis Auto Control.
Convergence
Tolerance
Relaxation Factor Specify the value of the Relaxation Factor.
Time step scale Specify the value of the Time step scale Factor.
Factor

Damping Per Property Subform


This subordinate form appears when Damping Per Property button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters
and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is
available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
326 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Damping Type Select either Property (use property) or Stiffness (use Rayleigh damping).
System Damping Select a time dependent field under Time Dependent Field. This field will be
Constant Table multiplied by the Scalar Factor for Load Curve entry. The (X,Y,Z) Trans.
Damping Forces and (X,Y,Z) Rot. Damping Moments entries (all of these form
a 6 component load vector) are multiplied by the scaled time dependent field.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 327
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
Time Dependent Select a Field, with it being entered into the System Damping Constant Table
Field list box. For example, select the field named damping_vs_time under Time
Dependent Field. For System Damping Constant Table f:damping_vs_time
appears.
Scale Factor for Specify the scale factor that will multiply the Time Dependent Field specified
Load Curve under System Damping Constant Table.
X Trans. Damping Scale factor for X translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
Y Trans. Damping Scale factor for Y translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
Z Trans. Damping Scale factor for Z translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
X Rot. Damping Scale factor for X rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Y Rot. Damping Scale factor for Y rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Z Rot. Damping Scale factor for Z rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Rayleigh Damping Specify the scalar coefficient () that the global stiffness matrix is multiplied
Coeff. by to obtain the Rayleigh damping matrix.

Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform


This subordinate form appears when Rigid Body Switch and Merge button is selected on the Sol700
Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where
Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
328 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Option Only option is At Start (D2R0000).
Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.
Properties
Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.
Deformable Select an entry under Deformable Property
Property
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 329
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
Master Rigid Select an entry under Master Rigid Property
Property
Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.
Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master
Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select the
particular Existing Merged Properties.
Define Set of Parts to See Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform, 330
be Switched
Define Inertial See Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform, 332
Properties of Rigid
Body
330 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform


This subordinate form appears when Define Set of Parts to be Switched button is selected on the Rigid
or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where
Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 331
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Option Only option is At Stage (D2RAUTO).
Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.
Properties
Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.
Deformable Select an entry under Deformable Property.
Property
Master Rigid Select an entry under Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property
Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.
Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.
Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master Rigid
Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select the particular
Existing Merged Properties.
Starting Switch Time Specify the time to switch the deformable and rigid properties.
Ending Switch Time Specify the time to terminate the switching of the deformable and rigid properties.
Delay Period Specify the time delay ( for switching.
Rigid Wall/Contact Specify the surface numbers for rigid walls/surfaces that are to contact.
Surf Number
Related Switch Set
Max. Permited Time Specify the maximum time step.
Step Size
Number of Specify the number of deformable parts that will be switched to rigid parts.
Deformable Parts to
Rigid
Number of Rigid Specify the number of rigid parts that will be switched to deformable parts.
Parts to Deformable
Activation Code Select one of the five flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2, 4) EQ.3, or 5) EQ.4.
Switch
Pair of Related Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.-1.
Switches
Nodal Rigid Body Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Activation Flag
Nodal Constraint Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Activation Flag
Rigid Wall Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Activation Flag
332 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform


This subordinate form appears when Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body button is selected on the
Rigid or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type
where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 333
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Option Only option is New Rigid Props. (D2RINNER).
Master Rigid Select a Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property
Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.
X Coord of Center of X coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Y Coord of Center of Y coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Z Coord of Center of Z coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Translational Mass Scalar mass value for translation, not rotation.
XX Comp. of Inertia XX (1,1) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXX)
XY Comp. of Inertia XY (1,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXY)
XZComp. of Inertia XZ (1,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXZ)
YY Comp. of Inertia YY (2,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IYY)
YZ Comp. of Inertia YZ (2,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IYZ)
ZZ Comp. of Inertia ZZ (3,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IZZ)

Eulerian Parameters Subform


This subordinate form appears when Eulerian Parameters button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and
Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available
such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
334 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Euler Boundary There are three choices, 1) Default, 2) Extrapolate (extrapolate structural mesh pressure to
Treatment Euler elements at solid/fluid boundary), or 3) Element (solid/fluid boundary Euler element
pressure equals the structural element pressure at the solid/fluid boundary).
Multi-Mat. Trans. There are three choices, 1) Default (Impulse), 2) Average (face (surface) velocity is
Scheme averaged simply), or 3) Impulse (face (surface) velocity is impulse weighted).
Material Failure There are three choices, 1) Default (No Fail), 2) Fail (activates transport of fail fraction and
Option thereby keeps track of material that has failed), or 3) No Fail (failed Euler material can
support shear stress again as soon as new material enters the Euler element).
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 335
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
Multi-Material The multi-material Eulerian elements use an overflow array to store their material data. This
Array Size array can hold “Multi-Material Array Size” times the number of Eulerian elements. If more
the 10% of the Eulerian elements have more than one material, the value of “Multi-Material
Array Size” must be increased.
Initial Condition A parameter value used to specify the accuracy of the initial conditions in Eulerian elements,
Accuracy when using the geometric shape definition. The parameter value is specified in the input file
using PARAM, MICRO, value.
Mimimum Velocity A parameter value used to specify the minimum velocity. If a calculated velocity is less than
this, it is set to zero (0). It is mainly used to eliminate harmless small values. The parameter
value is specified in the input file using PARAM, VELCUT, value.
Maximum Velocity Specify the maximum velocity for Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes. Although it is not
usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions in regions of
near-vacuous flow where using this can be an advantage. The same thing applies to
Lagrangian meshes, where there is contact. The parameter value is specified in the input file
using PARAM, VELMAX, value, YES/NO. Default is 1.0e10, YES. See the next row for
information on what YES/NO means.
Small Mass Removal Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small mass, the
mass in these elements may need to be removed for the analysis to be stable. The above
parameter (PARAM, VELMAX) is used to specify whether or not to eliminate small
masses. YES = eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity is > the value
of VELMAX. NO = do not eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity
is > the value of VELMAX. Default = YES.
Universal Gas Specify the value of the universal gas constant. The parameter value is specified in the input
Constant file using PARAM, UGASC, value.
Single Material Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements. For arbitrary Lagrange-
Elements Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength cannot be used.
Single Mats. with Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements with strength. For
Strength arbitrary Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength
cannot be used.
Multi-Material Specify the minimum density of multi-material Eulerian elements.
Elements
Roe Solver Scheme Specify whether or not to use the Roe solver. The Roe solver accounts for momentum
exchange between Lagrange (structure) and Eulerian material.
Spatial Accuracy There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order (left and right state variables
are taken as the values the state variables have at the left- and the right-element center), or
2) 2nd Order (left- and right-state variable values at a face by including the left-left and the
right-right element).
Time Integration There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order, or 2) 2nd Order (three-stage
Scheme time integration scheme).
336 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

SPH Control Parameters Subform


This subordinate form appears when SPH Control Parameters (SPH refers to smooth “particle
hydrodynamics”) button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit
Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,101 - Linear Static


• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 337
Solution Parameters

The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Form Parameters
Number of Cycles Specify the number of cycles between particle sorting.
Death Time Specify the time when SPH calculations are to be stopped.
Initial Number of Specify the initial number of neighbors per particle. This parameter is for specifying how
Neighbors much memory is to be allocated for arrays during initialization. If the value is positive, the
memory will be dynamically allocated. If the value is negative, the memory allocation will
be static (constant). During the calculation only the closest SPH elements will be considered
as neighbors. Using this option can avoid memory allocation problems.
Particle Approx. There are six theories to choose from, 1) Renormalization (approximation), 2) Symmetric
Theory (formulation), 3) Sym. Renormalization (symmetric renormalization approximation), 4)
Tensor (tensor formulation), 5) Fluid Particle (fluid particle approximation), 6) Fluid
Particle Renorm (fluid particle with renormalization approximation).
Start Time Specify the time to begin particle approximation.
Maximum Velocity Maximum velocity for the SPH particles. Particles whos velocity > this value are
deactivated.
Computation of Select one of the following for two different SPH parts, 1) Particle Approximation
Approx. (approximation is calculated), or 2) No Particle Approximation (approximation is not
calculated; two different SPH materials cannot interact with each other, and penetration is
allowed).
Intergration Type Select 1) 0 ( d  h  t   = 1--- h  t div  v  ), or 2) 1
dt d

( d  h  t   = 1--- h  t   div  v   1  3 ), for time integrating to obtain the


dt d

smoothing length.
Smoothing Length Select 1) Bucket (sort based on algorithm; very fast), or 2) Global (computation for all the
Comput. model particles ). This is done during initialization.
Box Type Select either 1) Fixed (the box remains fixed in space), or 2) Moving (the user specifies two
corners of the box and a the time dependent Field to describe the motion of the two corners).
As long as a given SPH particle is in a box, the SPH calculation for the particle is performed
for the box. If the particle leaves the box it was inside, it is deactivated.
Select Box Select the name of a box under Select Box. A box must have been previously created under
Loads/BCs: Create / Box Definition / Nodal.
Tail Vector Specify a vector, <X1 Y1 Z1>, that defines the minimum coordinates of the box
(coordinates of the corner of the box at the minimum location).
338 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

Form Parameters
Head Vector Specify a vector, <X2 Y2 Z2>, that defines the maximum coordinates of the box
(coordinates of the corner of the box at the maximum location).
Motion Vs Time Specify the time dependent Field that defines the motion of the two corners of the box.
Data
Vel./Disp. Flag Specify whether the time dependent Field is a Velocity or Displacement field.
Coord. System Specify the coordinate system that the Tail and Head Vectors are defined in.

Results Output Format


With the results output format form you can choose which output formats you want to use with each
solution sequence. The appropriate defaults are set for each solution type. These defaults can be changed
or set in the settings.pcl file.

Data Output Defines the type of data output.


• OP2 Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). This will place a
PARAM, POST, -1 in the input file.
• XDB Specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This will place a PARAM,
POST, 0 in the input file.
• Print Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran print file (*.f06).
• Punch Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran punch file (*.pch).
• MASTER Only When ON, only a .master file is written.
• MASTER/DBALL When ON, both a .master file and a .dball file are written.
• XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for accessing results.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 339
Solution Parameters

OUTPUT2 Requests Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands.

• P3 Built In - signals the use of MD Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared


toward Patran. These commands are also appropriate for PATRAN 2. The “P3 Built
In” option is appropriate only for Database Runs, see Solution Parameters, 267. If
Database Run has been deselected, this option will be set internally to “Alter File”.
• Alter File - specifies the use of an external alter file found on the Patran file path and
following the “msc_v#_sol#.alt” naming convention. See Files, 550 for more
details.
• CADA-X Alter - specifies the use of an LMS CADA-X specific alter file that is
identical to the “Alter File” but with an additional “.lms” extension, for example,
“msc_v67_sol103.alt.lms”.
• P2 Built In - specifies use of MD Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared
toward PATRAN 2.
OUTPUT2 Format Specifies format of the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use “Text” format when
the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between heterogeneous computer
platforms.

A new variable has been added to the settings.pcl file for results output format defaults per SOL
sequence:
NASTRAN_nnn_DATA_OUTPUT OP2+PUNCH
Where nnn is the solution sequence 101, 400 etc... and OP2+XDB+PRINT+PUNCH+MASTER
+DBALL are the options. This variable is only read from the settings.pcl file when opening a new
database, creating a new job or changing the solution sequence of an existing job. Otherwise the results
output settings are retrieved from the database for an existing job. Note that these variables must be added
to the settings.pcl file by the user and if they do not exist, a standard default is used. Also note that OP2
and XDB are mutually exclusive and both cannot be specified at the same time. The same is true for
MASTER Only and MASTER/DBALL. The settings.pcl file may have one of these variables for each
SOL sequence defined in Patran (>100).
340 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Solution Parameters

ADAMS Preparation
This form is used when you want to prepare a database for an Adams job.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 341
Solution Parameters

ADAMS Output • MNF Only


• Full Run + MNF
Units • Mass - Your options are: Kilogram, Pound-Mass, Slug, Gram, Ounce-
Mass, Kilo-Pound-Mass, Megagram
• Force - Newton, Pounds-Force, Ounce-Force, Dyne, Kilo-Newton, Kilo-
Pound-Force
• Length - Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Kilometer, Inch, Foot, Mile
• Time - Millisecond, Second, Minute, Hour
Craig-Bampton Modes Bounds • Lower Bound
• Upper Bound
Num. Shapes to Adams
ADAMS Debug Print
Strip Face
Create .out(OP2 file) for MSC
Fatigue
Mass Options • Partial
• Constant File
• Full
• None
Output Requests
Transfer Groups to ADAMS
342 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Select Superelements

3.6 Select Superelements


The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The superelements for a
subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button unselects all the
superelements. If Write PART Superelements toggle is ON in the Translation Parameters, 255 form, then
BEGIN BULK SUPER=id sections are written to the input file to define the superelements, otherwise if
this is OFF, SESET entries are used.
In addition to selecting the superelement, you can specify the superelement tree definition. This tell the
analysis which superelement are upstream of others and thus, not directly connected to the residual
structure or superelement zero (SE0). To define an upstream SE relative to its downstream SE, use the
form shown below to fill out the spreadsheet. Put focus in the Downstream databox, select a superelement
from the list, then select the upstream from the list and press Add. This adds a row to the spreadsheet.
Repeat this for every upstream element you need to define. Clicking on a row in the spreadsheet and
clicking Remove will remove the defintion. Downstream SEs can only appear in the speadsheet once.
This writes the SETREE entry.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 343
Select Superelements

SE5 SE6

SE4

SE3 SE1 SE2

In this example, SE1, SE2, & SE3 are upstream of the residual.
SE0 This is not necessary to define in the SE tree. However SE4 is
upstream of SE3 and SE5 & SE6 are upstream of SE4. These
should be defined in the tree.
344 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcases

3.7 Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases... button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MD
Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and various other
parameters to be used during part of a complete run.
The Patran MD Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with
each Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. You can access the Subcase
Parameters... and Output Requests... forms to view or modify these defaults.

Options are Create, Delete, and Global


Data.

Displays all the available subcases associated


with the current Solution Sequence.

The subcase name that is being created or


modified is displayed in this databox. It can be
typed in or picked from the Available Subcases
listbox.

Displays all the available loadcases in the current


database. Only one loadcase can be selected per
subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex
Eigenvalue solution types, free-free runs can be
generated by using an empty load case.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 345
Subcases

Deleting Subcases
To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.

Select the subcase(s) to delete.

Apply to delete the selected subcases.


346 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcases

Editing Subcases
To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Global
Data. The following form appears.

Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data.

Use Output Requests... to edit the output requests


associated with the selected subcases. The Edit
Output Request form appears. See Edit Output
Requests Form, 416.

Apply changes the output requests for all selected


subcases. Cancel closes the form without changes.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 347
Subcase Parameters

3.8 Subcase Parameters


The subcase parameters represent the settings in MD Nastran Case Control that take effect within a
subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following solution sequences have
subcase parameters associated with them.

Solution Sequences Other Conditions Description


Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 348 Model has p-elements Selects the subcase to participate in the
and utilizes Version 68 error analysis calculations in an
SOL 101 adaptive analysis. By default the
subcase participates in the error
analysis.
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 349 None Selects nonlinear static iteration
parameters.
SOL 106, 66
Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, None Selects nonlinear transient iteration
352 parameters.
SOL 129, 99
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 Version 68 Selects real eigenvalue extraction
parameters.
SOL 103
Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 365
DDAM Subcase Parameters, 397
Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 399
348 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Linear Static Subcase Parameters


This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain
p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle sets the ADACT
Case Control command.

Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the linear


static subcase. If enabled, the “Specify Rotor
Speed” button will be enabled, and can be
selected to display the Rotor Speed Form,
below.

See Contact Table, 386 for more information.

The reference rotor for the subcase. This


drives the RGYRO case control and Bulk Data
(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data
file.

Relative speed to the reference rotor. These


values define the SPDUNIT and SPEED fields of
the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The
SPDHIGH and SPDLOW entries are left blank.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 349
Subcase Parameters

Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters


This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form
when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the parameters that control
the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data
entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI Bulk Data entry is generated.

Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC field.

Defines what method to use to control the


stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is
incrementally applied. This parameter can have
one of three settings: Automatic, Semi-
Automatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the
setting of the KMETHOD field.

Defines the number of iterations to be used after each


matrix update. This is the KSTEP field.

Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be


done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Opens a subordinate form to activate the Arc-Length


Method which is turned OFF by default. The Arc-Length
Method is used to explore post-buckling paths.

Activates a buckling analysis at the end of the subcase.

Opens subordinate form to define eigenvalue extraction


parameters.

See Solvers/Options, 394 for more information.

Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the subcase.
350 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the
previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If
Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active.
Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance must
be met between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected,
a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.
Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is
selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
Load Tolerance on load equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations
to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field.
Load Tolerance is the EPSP field.
Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is
selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
Work Tolerance on work error. The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define
convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work
Tolerance is the EPSW field.
Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case
control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific
temperature LBCs defined
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 351
Subcase Parameters

Arc-Length Method Parameters


This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase
Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All
of the data is part of the NLPCI Bulk Data entry.

Defines the type of Arc-Length Method:


CRIS = Crisfield method (default)
RIKS = Riks method
MRIKS = modified Riks method

Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment


ratio between increments for the adaptive
arc-length method 0.0MINALR1.0.

Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment


ratio between increments for the adaptive
arc-length method MAXALR1.0.

Scale factor w for arc-length criteria:


w=0, displacement control
w>0, combined load and displacements
control
w»1, load control

Desired number of iterations for convergence


to be used for the adaptive arc-length
adjustments. This is the DESITER field

Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the subcase. This is the
MXINC field.
352 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters


This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form
when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.

Defines the Ending Time and Number


of Time Steps for the subcase.

Defines what method to use to control the stiffness.


The Mass matrix updates as the load is incrementally
applied. This parameter can have one of three
settings: Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is
the METHOD field.

Defines the number of time steps to be used in each


matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update
Method is set to Time Step. This is the NDT field.
Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to
be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if
Matrix Update Method is set to Adaptive. This is the
MAXBIS field.

Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be


done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 353
Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown
on the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If
Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active.
Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements that must be met between
interactions to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered
in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.
Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is
selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
Load Tolerance on load equilibrium that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If
Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP
field.
Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is
selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
Work Tolerance on work error that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work
Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW
field.
Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case
control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific
temperature LBCs defined
354 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Normal Modes Subcase Parameters


The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version
70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the
following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder,
Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that
an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the
EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range


of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1
and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the
V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues


to be located. This parameter can only be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power
or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR
Bulk Data entry.

See Contact Table, 386 for more information.


Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 355
Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on
the previous page.

Parameter Name Description


Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field
on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and
3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This
is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can
take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be
specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM
field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if
Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data
entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used.
This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter
cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on
the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis when the model
Analysis contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case Control command.
Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case
control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific
temperature LBCs defined
356 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters


This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the
solution type is Complex Eigenvalue.

Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the


complex eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, the
“Specify Spin Properties” button will be
enabled, and can be selected to display the
Spinning Properties Form, below.
Rotor dynamics is disabled by default.

See Contact Table, 386 for more information.

Synchronous (default) or
Asynchronous
Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran
RGYRO Bulk Data entry.

The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives


the RGYRO Case Control and Bulk Data
(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data
file.

Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These


values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and
SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk
Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.
For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed
databox is presented, defining SPEED field,
while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 357
Subcase Parameters

Transient Response Subcase Parameters


This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the
solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval and duration for a
transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entry.

Direct Transient and Modal Transient Solutions


This is the subcase parameters form for the Direct Transient and Modal Transient solution.

Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.

Modal Damping is only shown if you select Modal


Damping formulation from the Solution Type
form.

Use this button to define your TABDMP1 entry.


You must enter at least one value of frequency
and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to
occur.

See Contact Table, 386 for more information.


358 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Define Time Step


Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must be
positive. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TSTEP for more information.

The "Skip Factor" column


is optional. If the column is
empty, MD Nastran
assumes the Skip Factor
is 1.

"Add Row" adds a row


after the selected row.
To insert a row at the
beginning of the table,
select click on the row
label and select "Add
Row".

No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time. The skip factor defines which of the
solution points you wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 indicates every time step, 2
indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time accumulates in order of entry.
For the example shown, MD Nastran will calculate output at 100 time steps ranging between 1. and 100.

Define Damping
Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities
(same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last
entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the modal
damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create
such scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued,
even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 359
Subcase Parameters

(two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for
those frequencies are the same.

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To


insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on
the row label and select "Add Row".
360 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Frequency Response Subcase Parameters


This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and
the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a frequency
response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry.

Frequency Solution
This is the Frequency Subcase Parameter Form.

Use this button to define


FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4
entries.

Modal Damping is only shown if you select Modal


Damping formulation from the Solution Type form.

Use this button to define a TABDMP1 entry. At


least one value of frequency and damping must
be entered on the spreadsheet for damping to
occur.

Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the complex


eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, the “Specify Spin
Properties” button will be enabled, and can be
selected to display the Spinning Properties Form,
below.
Rotor dynamics is disabled by default.

See Contact Table, 401 for more information.

See Solvers/Options, 394 for more


information.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 361
Subcase Parameters

Use this form to create FREQi entries.

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table,
click on the row label and select "Add Row".

The driving column on this form is the Increment type.

Direct Frequency
When the
Increment type is... Patran...
Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows
will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used.
Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq.
and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.
Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.

Modal Frequency
When the
Increment Type is... Patran...
Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows
will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq, No. Incr. and Cluster/Spread
columns are not used.
362 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq.
and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. The Cluster/Spread
column is not used.
Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.
Lin. Cluster Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear distribution of
solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural modes in the specified
frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a default of 1.0 is used to bias the
linear distribution of solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing
towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the
frequency range.
Log. Cluster Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between the start
and end frequencies.
Lin. Spread Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a fractional
amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No. Incr. of 21, there will be
21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural
frequency, for all natural frequencies between the specified “Start Freq” and “End
Freq” values.
Fractional Spread Creates a FREQ5 entry. Enter the Start Frequency and End Frequency. These are the
lower and upper bound for the excitation (solution) frequency domain, respectively. It
is desired to obtain a set of excitation frequencies around and at each natural frequency,
obtained previously from the corresponding modal analysis for this simulation. This is
done by providing a list of fractions; for example {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}. The list is
“multiplied” by each natural frequency to provide a list of excitation frequencies for
each natural frequency; for example fn_j * {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}, where fn_j is the jth
natural frequency. The fractions cannot be inserted on a single row of the Define
Frequencies form, but multiple rows must be created, with just one fraction per row.

Define Damping
Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive.
Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except
the first and last entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more
information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the modal
damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create
such scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued,
even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 363
Subcase Parameters

(two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for
those frequencies are the same.

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To


insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on
the row label and select "Add Row".

To create a Field for the damping data, click in the


Create a Field checkbox.

To bring in damping data from an existing Field,


click on the Load Data From Field button, then
select the Field.

Spinning Properties, Frequency Response


Presented when Rotor Dynamics is ON and the Specify Spinning Properties button is selected.
364 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Synchronous (default) or
Asynchronous
Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran
RGYRO Bulk Data entry.

The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives


the RGYRO Case Dontrol and Bulk Data
(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data
file.

Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These


values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and
SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk
Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.
For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed
databox is presented, defining SPEED field,
while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.
For Synchronous analyses with Frequency
Dependent Looping OFF, no speed databoxes
are presented, and SPDHIGH, SPDLOW,
SPEED are all left blank. Rather, a “param,
gyroavg,-1” entry is generated. Frequency
Dependent Looping is ON by default.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 365
Subcase Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters


The type of nonlinear analysis can be changed in each SOL 600 or SOL 400 subcase. To specify this
change, the Subcases form includes an Analysis Type pull-down menu with options for static, normal
modes, buckling, transient dynamic, creep, and body approach analyses. For SOL 400 there is an
additional Analysis Type, complex eigenvalue. In turn, specifying the subcase parameters is dependent
on the Analysis Type selected for the subcase. The following sections define the subcase parameters for
each analysis type.
366 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type


This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 or 600 static analysis subcase.

Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.


Nonlinear Solution Parameters
• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included
in the subcase.
• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 367
Subcase Parameters

Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each
iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be
determined.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in
the analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase.
Break Squeal Parameters For defining parameter values for modeling break squeal for the
subcase. (SOL 400 only).

Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters


This subform defines the parameters for a normal modes analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 for more information.

Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters


For buckling nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue extraction techniques and
the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction. This subform defines the parameters for a buckling
analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 for more
information.
368 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters


This subform defines the parameters for a transient dynamic analysis subcase for SOL 600 and SOL 400.

Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.


Nonlinear Solution Parameters
• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included in
the subcase.
• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 369
Subcase Parameters

Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each
iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be
determined.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in
the analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase
(SOL 600 only).
370 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters


This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 and SOL 400 Creep analysis subcase.

Creep Solution Parameters


• Procedure Defines either Explicit creep formulation or Implicit creep formulation.
• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included in the
subcase.
• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.
Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 371
Subcase Parameters

• Adaptive Increment Parameters... For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for incrementation.
Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each
iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be
determined.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the
analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL
600 only).
Break Squeal Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters


This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 body approach analysis subcase

Body Approach Parameters


• Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step.
• Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the rest stop
moving.
Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis.
See Contact Table, 386
372 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters


This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 (only) complex eigenvalue analysis subcase

Formulation Select either Direct or Modal.


Enable Rotor Dynamics Click in checkbox to activate rotor dynamics.
Specify Spinning Properties... Click to access the form for specifying the rotor speed. See Spinning Properties,
Frequency Response, 363
Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis.
See Contact Table, 386
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 373
Subcase Parameters

Load Increment Parameters


Load and time step incrementation parameters for Statics and Transient Dynamics appear on this
subordinate form. For other analysis types, this information appears directly on the Solution Parameters
form.

The Load Increment Parameters form differs depending on your designation of a Fixed or Adaptive
Increment Type and whether an arclength method is to be used if you select an Adaptive Incrementation
scheme.
374 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Adaptive Load Incrementation without Arclength

Static Transient Dynamic

Increment Type Adaptive


Arclength Method None
Trial Time Step Size Defines the initial time step size. Default is 1% of Total Time if left blank.
Time Step Scale Factor Indicates load will be allowed to be scaled up by 20% each increment if possible.
Default is 1.2.
Minimum Time Step Indicates the smallest time step that can be used. Default is Trial Time Step / 1000 if
left blank.
Maximum Time Step Indicates the largest time step that can be used. Default is Total Time / 2 if left blank.
Maximum # of Steps Defines the maximum number of time steps. It can be left blank which will default
to the Initial Step Size divided by the Total Time.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 375
Subcase Parameters

Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1) if left
blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total time is the length
of time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the actual value is used
(not recommended because it can’t be variable).
# of Steps of Output Indicates that this many increments evenly spaced in time will be place in the output
file. Default is 0 if left blank. Which means all converged increments will be output
(SOL 600 only).
Quasi-static Inertial ON by default.
Damping
Criteria Multiple adaptive load stepping criteria is available. By default, none of this is
necessary. These criteria are described below in Adaptive Load Incrementation
Criteria, 377.
Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic
analysis.
Minimum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the
Increment Iteration Parameters, 381 form.
Maximum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the
Increment Iteration Parameters, 381 form.
Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD field on
the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.

Load Increment Parameters for SOL 600 and SOL 400, Creep analysis. The MD Nastran entries used for
this are NLADAPT, NLPARM, and TSTEPNL.
376 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Creep

Increment Type There are three choices, 1) Fixed, 2) Adaptive, and 3) Adaptive Creep.
Suggested Time Increment The approximate time step.
Total Time The total time for the creep analysis.
Max # of Increment Allowed This is for NSMAX.
Creep Tests This is for RAC.
Relative Strain Tolerance This is for TCSTRN.
Relative Stress Tolerance This is for TCSTRS.
Low Stress Cut-off Tolerance This is for TCOFF.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 377
Subcase Parameters

Adaptive Load Incrementation Criteria

This for the MD Nastran NLAUTO entry, Parameters for Automatic Load/Time Stepping. (SOL 600
only).

Adaptive Criteria Description


Treat Criteria as: If Limits, sets 3rd field to zero (0) in 3rd data block (default). If Targets, sets field
to one (1). This is for LIMITAR.
Use Automatic Criteria Uses automatic physical criteria if top toggle is ON. Bottom toggle defines what
Continue if not Satisfied happens if the criteria is not met. Both OFF by default. This is for IPHYS.
378 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Adaptive Criteria Description


Ratio Between Steps: Defines the [Smallest] and [Largest] ratios acceptable between load increments.
For Smallest, default = 0.1, For Largest, default=10.0. This is for RSMALL and
RBIG.
[Number of Cutbacks] Blank by default. default value is 10 if left blank or zero. This is for NCUT.
Increment Criteria Selects the type of criteria to be used.The
labels “XXX Range” and “XXX
Increment Allowed” will change based on
the Increment Criteria selected. This is for
CRITERIA.

Loading Table Instances Determines how loading tables (Use Tables must be ON in the Job Parameters
form) are treated. By default loads are increased or decreased such that they always
Reach Peaks-Valleys Only. If you wish you can Reach All Points in Tables or
Ignore all Points in Tables.
Write Instances to Post File Writes Loading Table Instances to the Post file if toggle is ON. Note that if toggle
is ON, then only those instances are written to the POST file and not all the
increments of the analysis. This is for IDMPFLG.
Nodal Temp. Check There are three choices, 1) Omit Check, 2) Below Finish Temperature (to complete
time period when all node temperatures are < FTEMP), and 3) Above Finish
Temperature (to complete time period when all node temperatures are > FTEMP).
This is for IFINISH.
Finish Temperature The terminal temperature. This is for FTEMP.
Use Criterion For a criteria to be used, this toggle must be turned ON.
“Criterion” Range The first and last fields are zero and 1e20 respectively and cannot change. The
second and third must be the same as well as the 4th/5th and 6th/7th which define
the ranges. The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criterion
chosen.
“Criterion” Increment The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criteria chosen.
Allowed
Select a Group (Optional) You can optionally select a group of elements to which this criterion is to be
applied. No group is selected by default.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 379
Subcase Parameters

Adaptive Load Incrementation with Arclength (SOL 600 only)

Static

Adaptive Increment Parameter Description


Arclength Method Selects the arclength root procedure: Crisfield, Riks/Ramm, Modified
Riks/Ramm, or Crisfield-Modified Riks/Ramm. The default is Modified
Riks/Ram. If None is selected the form updates as shown (p. 373). For
Transient Dynamics, this is the only option available for adaptive load
incrementation.
Automatic Cutback This feature is ON by default. If an increment does not converge, a restart
from the last increment cuts the increment size in half.
Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how
many times a cutback is allowed.
380 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

Adaptive Increment Parameter Description


Initial Fraction of Load This is the fraction of the total load that should be applied in the first iteration
Applied to 1st Increment of the first increment.
Max. Fraction of Load Applied This is the maximum fraction of the load that can be applied in any
in Any Increment increment.
Max/Min Ratio Arc Length Used to define the minimal arclength. The default is 0.01.
/ Initial Arc Length
Max. # of Increments Defines the maximum number of increments. Program will end if this value
is exceeded.
Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one
(1) if left blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total
time is the length of time between distinct time points if left blank.
Otherwise the actual value is used (not recommended because it can’t be
variable).

Fixed Load Incrementation

Static Transient Dynamic


Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 381
Subcase Parameters

Fixed Increment
Parameter Description
Automatic Cutback Applies to Nonlinear Statics only. It is ON by default. If an increment does
not converge, it allows for a restart from the last increment cuts the
increment size in half.
Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how
many times a cutback is allowed.
Number of Increments For Statics and Creep this is the number of increments specified in the
or NLAUTO option. Or for Transient Dynamics defines the number of steps to
Number of Steps use throughout the analysis for Fixed time step type. Default is 10.
Total Time For Statics, this enters the NLAUTO option which is the total time as
defined in this widget. For Transient Dynamics this is the total time.

For Creep, the total time is either placed in the 2nd data block of a CREEP
INCREMENT option or the total time is divided by the Number of
Increments, if this value is present, and the incremental time is written to the
2nd data block of the CREEP option.
Gamma / Beta For Transient Dynamics only. Default is 0.5.
Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, the Houbolt and Central Difference cannot be
selected. Indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic
analysis.Single Step Houbolt is the default.
Minimum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined
on the Iteration Parameters, 381 form.
Maximum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined
on the Iteration Parameters, 381 form.
Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD
field on the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.

Iteration Parameters
This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters... / Iteration Parameters... button is selected
for Analysis Type: Static, Transient Dynamics, Creep, ... Subcases form. Unless otherwise specified all
382 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide
Subcase Parameters

parameter references apply to the NLSTRAT (SOL600) entry for the form on the left, and NLPARM
(SOL 400) entry for the form on the right .

SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Description


Proceed if not Converged Forces the analysis to proceed even if the increment did not converge.
Initial Stress Stiffness There are five choices, 1) Full, 2) None, 3) Tensile, 4) Deviatoric, and 5)
Begin Increment.
Non-positive Definite This forces the non-positive definite flag (IKNONPOS param) ON in the
NLSTRAT option. A new NLSTRAT option is written for each step if a
change in this flag has been detected from Subcase to Subcase.
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 383
Subcase Parameters

SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Description


Iteration Method Indicates the iteration method (IKMETH param) to be used. This is can be
set to Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-
Raphson with Strain Correction, or Secant Method. Full Newton-Raphson
is default.
Max # of Iterations Defines the maximum number of iterations (MAXREC param) allowed for
per Increment convergence in any increment. This number is negative if Proceed if not
Converged is ON from the Solution Parameter form.
Minimum # of Iterations This specifies the minimum number of iterations per Increment (MINREC
param) option. It can be an integer number zero or greater. If this is set
per Increment greater than zero, every increment will perform at least this many
iterations.
Desired # of Iterations Defines the number of desired iterations in an increment (ATRECYC
per Increment param) which is placed on the NLSTRAT option. If the actual number of
iterations is less than this value, this will be used to figure out how much
to increase the load step for the next increment. In a similar manner if the
actual number of iterations is greater than this number (but less than the
Max # of Iterations per Increment, this will be used to decrease the load
step in the next increment. Obviously if Adaptive incrementation is not
specified, this data will not be used.
Matrix Update Method There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MD
Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on
convergence rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MD Nastran updates the matrix at
every KSTEP interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3)
Adaptive, 4) Semi-Automatic (MD Nastran for each load increment (i)
performs a single iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the
stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full
Newton (MD Nastran updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6)
Pure Full Newton (the same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = -
0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and MAXLS = 0.0).
Tolerance Method Defines the tolerance method to be used (CONVTYP param). This can be
set to Residual, Incremental Displacement, or Incremental Strain Energy.
Residuals/Displacements If you want the Tolerance Method to use both Residuals and Displacements
to determine convergence set this to And. If you want either one or the
And other to determine convergence, set this to OR. If Tolerance Method is set
Or
to Residual or Displacement, then these two toggles are enabled. Both are
OFF by default. If one is ON, the other is OFF. These toggles work in
combination with Tolerance Method. If both are OFF, then Tolerance
Method determines what is written.
Error Type Indicates the type of error to use (IRELABS param